eRTU_hbb

Foreword, Table of Contents The SICAM eRTU System
SICAM eRTU Technical Description
Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU Input / Output Modules Time Signal Receiver System Functions Functions of the Digital Input Module Functions of the Analog Input Modules Functions of the Command Output Module Functions of the Command Release Module Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS Communication with the Control Center Anhang References, Glossary, Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 A
Release: 17.06.03 E50417-S8976-C179-A1
Notes on Safety
This manual does not constitute a complete catalog of all safety measures required for operating the equipment (module, device) in question because special operating conditions might require additional measures. However, it does contain notes that must be adhered to for your own personal safety and to avoid damage to property. These notes are highlighted with a warning triangle and different keywords indicating different degrees of danger: Danger means that death, severe injury, or substantial damage to property will occur if the appropriate safety measures are not taken. Warning means that death, severe injury, or substantial damage to property can occur if the appropriate safety measures are not taken. Caution means that minor injury or damage to property can occur if the appropriate safety measures are not taken. Note: is important information about the project, handling the product, or the part of the documentation in question, to which special attention must be paid. Qualified Personnel Commissioning and operation of the equipment (module, device) described in this manual must be performed by qualified personnel only. As used in the safety notes contained in this manual, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, release, ground, and tag devices, systems, and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards. Use as Prescribed The equipment (device, module) must not be used for any other purposes than those described in the Catalog and the Technical Description. If it is used together with third-party devices and components, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Correct and safe operation of the product requires adequate transportation, storage, installation, and mounting as well as appropriate use and maintenance. During operation of electrical equipment, it is unavoidable that certain parts of this equipment will carry dangerous voltages. Severe injury or damage to property can occur if the appropriate measures are not taken:
Before making any connections at all, ground the equipment at the PE terminal. Hazardous voltages can be present on all switching components connected to the power supply. Even after the supply voltage has been disconnected, hazardous voltages can still be present in the equipment (capacitor storage). Equipment with current transformer circuits must not be operated while open. The limit values indicated in the manual or the operating instructions must not be exceeded; that also applies to testing and commissioning.
Disclaimer We checked the compliance of the contents of the printed document with the described hardware and software. However, inconsistencies may not be excluded so that we do not warrant total compliance. This manual is revised regularly and any necessary corrections are incorporated in the subsequent editions. Proposals for improvement welcome. Technical changes reserved. 5.00.01
Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved Unless expressly permitted otherwise, this document is to be retained, reproduction, exploitation and disclosure of its contents is not allowed. Liability for damages in the case of non-compliance. All rights reserved, in particular if patent is granted or GM registration is obtained. Registered trademarks SIMATIC, SIMATIC NET, SINAUT and SICAM are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. The other designations in this manual could be trademarks whose use by third persons for their respective purposes could violate the rights of their owners.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Book No. E50417-S8976-C179-A1
Foreword
Purpose of this manual In this manual, you will find a
q q q q
System overview Description of the hardware components and their functions Description of the central functions Overview over the SICAM eRTU software products
Target audience
This manual is intended mainly for all persons who configure, parameterize and operate a SICAM eRTU. SICAM eRTU Version 5.0
Scope of validity of this manual Standards
SICAM eRTU was developed according to the ISO 9001:2000 quality standards. If you have any questions about the SICAM eRTU system, please contact your Siemens sales representative. Our hotline offers you around-the-clock support. Tel.: ++49 -180 - 5 24 70 00 Fax: ++49 -180 - 5 24 24 71 e-mail: support@ptd.siemens.de If you are interested in our topical training program, please contact our training center: Siemens AG Power Transmission and Distribution PTD SE Training Center Humboldtstr. 59 90459 Nrnberg Germany Phone: Fax: Internet: ++49 - 911 - 4 33 70 05 ++49 - 911 - 4 33 79 29 www.ptd-training.com
Further support
Hotline
Training courses
SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1
Foreword
Overview over the SICAM for eRTU Documentation

This overview will give you a rough idea of which information or guideline can be found in which manual. Planning Which hardware and software components are necessary for covering the requirements of my project? Can I integrate existing components? Can I use my PC? Which system knowledge is necessary for system management? /18/ /16/ Ordering /18/ /16/ Assembling, mounting hardware components /3/ /18/ /17/ Installing the software SICAM eRTU, Technical Description SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design Who can provide support on technical and handling questions? Is my order complete and correct? SICAM eRTU, Technical Description SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design Which safety measures are required? Which order and which rules must be observed for the mounting procedure? SIMATIC S7/M7, Programmable Controllers Module Specifications S7-400, M7-400 SICAM eRTU, Technical Description SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions How do I proceed for installing? Which details have to be observed when authorizing? Which prerequisites must be given? /14/ SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS Product Information Configuring / parameterizing Which is the right order for configuring/parameterizing? Where do I set which parameters? How do I download my data to the PLC? Which tools are available for a data test? How can I document my data? How do I archive data?
Foreword
/20/ /14/
SICAM eRTU, Startup SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS Online help system
Configuring the control
Where do I configure a control? Which functions are included as blocks in the scope of delivery? How do I test and compile the configured control? /1/ /4/ /14/ /15/ /20/ SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 SIMATIC S7, CFC for S7, Manual SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS SICAM eRTU, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks SICAM eRTU, Startup Online help system
Commissioning
How do I avoid disturbances, accidents when commissioning my system / during operation? Which persons are able / authorized to operate my system? SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions Does the system require any maintenance? What is the reason for a system fault indication, what is the appropriate remedy? Where can I configure additional error messages? SICAM eRTU, Technical Description SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS SICAM RTU, Mounting Instructions SICAM Diamond
/14/ /17/ Diagnostics / troubleshooting
/18/ /14/ /13/ /19/
Foreword
Table of Contents
The SICAM eRTU System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SICAM eRTU system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options for expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SICAM eRTU Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expandability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 2 5 10 12 13 15 15 16 18 19 21 22 22 25 26 28 28 30
Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 Mounting of the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of Free-Standing Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications of the Free-Standing Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall-Mounting Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UR1/UR2 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1
Table of Contents
2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU (Central Processing Unit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCP Communications Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCP Communications Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-Pin RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-Pin RS422/RS485 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XC2 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XF6 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 Interface Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 Interface Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 31 33 34 35 35 43 44 46 48 58 59 62 64 66 69 70 73 73 75 76 78 80 81 81 82
Input / Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 Module Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DI Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.6 4
AI Analogue Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Circuit of the AI-32 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Circuit of the AI-16 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overvoltage Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/D converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO Command Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Output on the CO Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR Command Release Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Release on the CR Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and Diagnostic Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86 89 90 90 90 91 91 95 97 98 102 105 108 110 114 118 119 120 120 121 122 122 123 124 124 125
Time Signal Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 DCF77 Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IRIG-B Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 Interplay between the CPU and MCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Operating State of the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organization Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127 128 131 133 134 135 139 140 143 144 145 147 148 149 150 159 160 161 165 166 166 167 168 169
Functions of the Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 State Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications of the DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bitstrings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metered Value Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the DI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 Measured Value Capturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the Command Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.2 8.3 Command Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the CO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Table of Contents
Functions of the Command Release Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.2 9.2.1 9.3 Inputs of the CR Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications of the CR Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs of the CR Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output of the CR Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Command Release Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171 172 172 172 173 173 174
10
Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 Configuring and Parameterizing the SICAM eRTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication with Bay Devices/Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telecontrol Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SICAM CFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SICAM Diamond. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 176 177 179 180 183 184 185 187 188 188 190 191 194 196 197 199
11
Communication with the Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 11.1.5 11.1.6 11.1.7 Data Exchange with the Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Transmission (Operating Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spontaneous Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanned Transmission Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cyclic Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telecontrol Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Table of Contents
11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4 11.3.5 11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 11.4.4 11.4.5 11.4.6 11.5 11.5.1 11.5.2
Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Area in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Procedures of the IEC 60870-5-T101 Telegram Structure . Safety functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-104 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Area in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences to the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Center Link with the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Duration Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizational Telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Code Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Point Transmission SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Center Link with the DNP V3.00 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201 201 203 205 207 218 222 223 223 225 226 229 241 242 242 243 245 252 259 260 262 263 267
12
Table of Contents
11.6 11.6.1 11.6.2 11.6.3 11.6.4 11.6.5 A
Control Center Link with the TELEGYR 800 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Area in the TELEGYR 800 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information in Monitoring Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information in Control Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275 275 278 281 288 292 295 296 299 301
Anhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.2 A.3 Indications of the Transmission Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications of the Substation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications of the Bay Device Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References Glossary Index
13
Table of Contents
14
The SICAM eRTU System

Introduction The SICAM eRTU is an open modular telecontrol and substation automation system. The specific functions of a telecontrol system are combined with those of a programmable automation system.. The purpose of this chapter is to specify the performance characteristics of SICAM eRTU in a brief system overview.
Objective
Contents
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
System Description System Safety System Capacity Expandability
2 13 15 19
1 The SICAM eRTU System
1.1
System Description
Increasingly high demands are being placed on safe and reliable management of supply networks for electricity, water, gas, remote heating, and waste water treatment plants for both industrial and private sectors. Demands for economic efficiency, shorter down times, and a heightened environmental consciousness set the standards by which the capability, reliability and availability of these systems are measured. Central monitoring and control of these geographically widespread processes and quick reactions to possible malfunctions are important prerequisites for cost efficient management.
SICAM eRTU
The SICAM eRTU system offers you a system solution which has been optimized to meet these demands. The specific functions of a telecontrol unit are combined with the versatility of a programmable automation system designed for the automation of geographically widespread processes. SICAM eRTU is used for applications where
q q q q q q
distributed processes are monitored and controlled. functions which used to be available on the higher control level are decentralised and localised on-site. high requirements are made for voltage immunity and electromagnetic compatibility. a real-time capable system is required. immunity to interfering is very important. communication with other automation systems must be possible.
1.1 System Description
SICAM eRTU fulfils the following main tasks:

q q q q q q
System control and monitoring by a control center using safe and reliable remote data transmission protocols Connection of protection / bay devices and substations A wide variety of communication capabilities using various transmission mediums (WT, TFH, FO, and radio relay) Safe and reliable process inputs/outputs with high isolation voltage (2.5 kV) Fast, sequential processing of digital and analog process data with high-resolution time stamp (1 millisecond) Conditioning and compression of the process data acquired (e.g., generation of counting values, processing of threshold values, change in state delay, debouncing, and signal settling) Flow-optimized remote data transmission (i.e., spontaneous, cyclic or scanned transmission, differentiated scan lists, priority increase, general check, and selective telegram request)
Specific automation tasks
With the flexible configuration tool SICAM CFC a variety of automation tasks can be realised individually. These include:
q q q q q q
Output of command sequences Command interlocks Generation of group indications Indication logging Sequential control systems Connection of bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface
Applications
There are almost no limits to the wide variety of applications for which the modular and open SICAM eRTU system can be used:
q q q q
Supply networks of cities and regional supply companies (e.g., gas, electricity, water, waste water and remote heating) Transformer substations of supraregional power supply companies Supply networks for public transportation (subways, commuter trains and street cars) Data acquisition and control of systems in the buildings of railroads and public transportation (escalators, lighting, and air-conditioning, among others) Traffic control systems for trains and ships Weirs, locks and dams involved in water resource systems Water purification and storage systems Monitoring and control of chemical and petrochemical systems and pipelines Monitoring and control of conveyor and transportation systems Environmental technology with acquisition of measuring data and remote evaluation
q q q q q q
Communications protocols q
The system's communication processors support the communication protocols for Control centre interface
q q q q q q
IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP) SINAUT 8-FW DNP V3.00 TELEGYR 800 TELEGYR 8979 IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103 DNP V3.00 PROFIBUS DP
q q
Substation communication
q
Bay device connection

q q q
1.1.1
SICAM eRTU system architecture

The typical SICAM eRTU architecture is:
q q q q
Substation controller SICAM eRTU (SICAM eRTU Controller) Connection to the higher-level control centres Serial link to bay level / to substations PG (programming device) or PC with SICAM plusTOOLS
Control centre / node

DCF77 e. g. IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM plusTOOLS Configuration
SICAM eRTU Controller
SIMATIC NET
Process interface
Substation
Bay devices with IEC 60870-5-103

SUC251,wmf
Fig. 1-1
Configuration of a SICAM eRTU, example
Information on configuration options, as well as a list of the components, can be found in the SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design /16/ and in SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/
Control centre communication with IEC 60870-5104
The IEC 60870-5-104 telegram can be used to establish a communication link with a higher-level control center via LAN / WAN. Possible link configurations are:
q q
RS232 interface - Terminal Server - LAN - Router - WAN RS232 interface - Router - WAN
to control center (via WAN) Router Station LAN (Industrial Ethernet)
Terminal Server RS232 port
LAN Local Area Network WAN Wide Area Network

SUC254.wmf
Fig. 1-2
Control center communication with IEC 60870-5-104 via Terminal Server and Industrial Ethernet
to control center (via WAN) Router RS232 port
SUC255.wmf
Fig. 1-3
Control center communication with IEC 60870-5-104
Bay device connection via PROFIBUS

PS 20A DC 48 /20

e.g. IEC 60870-5-101 DCF77
CPU 488 -3 00 0XX0000-0XX CP 44 3-5 XC2 X2 34 &M D1010-0B A00
X
6ES7 x x-1 XJ00-0AB0 CP xx 41
X3 X 4 5 443-5FX00-0XE0 CP xx x
XF6 0XX0000-0XX 00 X2 X 3 4 6M D1010-0BA 20 P CP xx x
XF6 0XX0000-0XX00 X2 X 3 4 6MD1010-0BA20 P CP xx x
s
INTF BATT1 F BATT2 F BAF DC5 V DC2 4V
INTF EXTF SD HD USR1 USR2
I NTF EX TF
RUN STOP
RUN STOP RUN
T 1
T 1
R1
R1
FMR
RUN-P RUN
RUN STOP
STOP T 2 T 2
STOP MRES
R2 R2
BAT T 1
BAT T 2
T 3
T 3
R3
R3
T 4
T 4
R4
R4
2 BAT T OF F 1 BAT T
T 5
T 5
R5
R5
T 6
T 6
X1
L+ LPE
EXT.-BATT.
PROFIBUS
R6 R6
5 ... 15 V DC
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS-DP
20
21
22
23
24
25
PROFIBUS-DP
SIMEAS Q 7KG-8000-8AB/BB
20
21
22
23
24
25
RUN
BF
DIA
SIMEAS Q 7KG-8000-8AB/BB
RUN
BF
DIA
10
10
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q
ET200
suc194
Fig. 1-4
SICAM eRTU, bay device connection via PROFIBUS DP- Example
Communication with substations
You can establish from the SICAM eRTU a link to all types of substations which are able to communicate using the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol (in unbalanced mode). These include
q q q q q q
SICAM SC, SICAM RTU, SICAM miniRTU, SICAM microRTU, SINAUT LSA and Third-party stations.
Substations can be connected in a point-to-point configuration, a line configuration or a combination of both.
Substations
SICAM SC
SICAM RTU
SICAM miniRTU
Third-party station
SUC252.wmf
Fig. 1-5
Communication with different substations in point-to-point configuration - Example
A line configuration can cater for up to 16 connected substations.
Substation x
Substation y
Substation z
suc253.wmf
Fig. 1-6
Communication with substations in line configuration - Example
Note: If the substations are not supported by an RS485 interface, a modem is required. If longer distances must be bridged, modems which permit staggering must be used for the required RS232 interfaces.
1.1.2
Options for expansion

The modular design of the system allows any combination within the limits of the system capacity described in Chapter1.3. If a substation is required, provide the SICAM eRTU controller with up to 3040 central input / output points.
Maximum expansion Variant 1

SICAM plusTOOLS
Configuration
e.g. DCF77
e. g. IEC 60870-5-101

SIMATIC NET
3040 Information - central

SUC146
Fig. 1-7
SICAM eRTU with maximum number of input / output points
10
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
Maximum expansion Variant 2
If a controller with many communication interfaces is required, the SICAM eRTU controller with 3 connections can be expanded to higherlevel control centres and 96 links to the bay level.
e.g. DCF77 e. g. IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM plusTOOLS
Configuration
SIMATIC NET
Bay devices with IEC 60870-5-103

SUC147
Fig. 1-8
SICAM eRTU connected with the maximum number of MCP (example for configuration).
11
1.1.3

The following components form the basic equipment of a SICAM eRTU controller in a free-standing cabinet:
q q q q
Base system Hardware
Power Supply SIMATIC S7-400 CPU MCP (Modular Communication Processor) IM (Interface Module to expansion rack), if required I/O modules Time signal receiver for DCF77, GPS or IRIG-B
Additional modules of the SICAM eRTU Controller eRTU Runtime system Configuration tools
q q
SICAM RTC eRTU (Run Time Components)
SICAM plusTOOLS eRTU, application for planning and parameterizing the plant configuration.
SICAM plusTOOLS uses the SIMATIC base software STEP 7. Logging /Control / Diagnostics SICAM Diamond is used for diagnostics of system information such as MCP data, data of the bay devices, communication connections etc. In addition, you can use SICAM Diamond for control purposes and log information in an event list. User-specific functions are realised with SICAM CFC. With the standard SIMATIC programming languages AWL or SCL, application programs can be created independently of SICAM eRTU.
User programs
12
1.2 System Safety
1.2
System Safety
The SICAM eRTU system to a large extent fulfills the reliability and safety requirements which have to be met by a substation automation system. Special attention was paid to the electromagnetic compatibility of all electronic devices which are part of the SICAM eRTU system.
Power supply interruption Safety functions
The SICAM eRTU system is designed for maintenance-free duty, i.e. no back-up batteries are needed for restart after a mains failure.
q q
Hardware self-test: during startup and cyclically in the background. General Interrogation:
- during the start of the runtime system - in the background. Communication Data transmission errors resulting from electromagnetic interference, ground potential differences, ageing of components and other interference and noise sources in the transmission channels are safely detected. The safety precautions included in the protocols protect against:
q q q q
bit and telegram errors information loss undesired information separation of or adverse effects on related information.
Telegram transmission with priority control
Event-triggered telegrams are made available quickly thanks to priority control.
13
Indication acquisition
The status for indications is derived in the case of:

q q q
contact chatter signaling-circuit voltage failure module out of order.
A telecontrol malfunction group indication can be parameterized with SICAM CFC from individual items of information, for example:
q q q q q q
mcb trip voice-frequency telegraphy error Channel Error No signaling voltage module out of order buffer overflow.
Measured Value Capturing CO Command Output Module
Live zero monitoring (4-20 mA).
Safe command output with central command output modules, i.e.

q q q q
target check (1-out-of-n) Switching current check interference voltage monitoring determination of the coil resistance.
The SICAM eRTU system provides the following five operating modes, thus allowing to take into account different safety requirements for process output:
q q q q q
1-pole command output 1 1/2-pole command output 2-pole command output 1 1/2-pole command output with release through CR module 2-pole command output with release through CR module.
By combining the CO module with the CR module, a single error (in case of 1 1/2-pole command output) in the command output circuit results in the command not being executed. Through the test and monitoring measures provided by the CR module, which make it possible to distribute the command output circuit to two independent modules, the high VDEW requirements are met.
14
1.3 System Capacity
1.3
1.3.1
System Capacity
Information
The maximum expansion of the SICAM eRTU controller consists of:
q
1 Central rack with 7 to 11 unoccupied slots, depending on the communication assembly MCP which is selected (see Chapter 2.5) and up to 6 expansion racks with 14 unoccupied slots each.
This gives a maximum of 95 unoccupied slots which can be equipped with, for instance - 95 function modules (input and output) or - additional 4 MCP(4) assemblies (5 slots each to connect max. 96 bay devices via fibre-optic cables) and 75 function modules (input and output). The connection to PROFIBUS DP does not require an own slot as it is realised via an interface of the CPU module. Central information points You can supply 32 central items of information to each function module. This provides a maximum number of 3 040 central items of information, which can be parameterized as::
q q q q q q q q q q q
Single-point indications Double-point indications Fleeting indications Bit pattern indication Transformer tap indication Metered value indication Measured value indication Single command Double command Analog scheduled values Digital set-point values (16 central items of information per module)
Distributed information points
Local bay devices and substations are connected via the communication interfaces of the MCP assemblies or via the PROFIBUS DP interface. The maximum expansion provides up to 10 000 local items of information.
15
1.3.2
Interfaces
A SICAM eRTU Controller can be expanded with independent interfaces to max. 3 higher-level control centres. Telecontrol protocols
q q q q q q
Telecontrol interfaces
IEC 60870-5-101. SINAUT 8-FW DNP V3.00 TELEGYR 800 TELEGYR 8979 IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP),
are operated with interface standard RS232. Alternatively, for telecontrol protocol
q
IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC)
you can use interface standards X.21 (RS485) and RS422 (RS485). The connection is realised via the interfaces of the communication processor MCP and the XC2 expansion module of the MCP assemblies. It is possible to combine two different telecontrol protocols for one MCP assembly. Bay device interfaces The bay controller protocols
q q
IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED) and DNP V3.00 (COM IED)
require interface standard RS485 or an FO interface. Various options exist for the connection of local items of information via bay devices or substations:
q
fibre-optic interfaces to connect maximum 96 bay devices, realised via maximum 4 MCP assemblies, each consisting of - 1 communication processor MCP and - 4 XF6 expansion modules. RS485 lines to connect a maximum number of 96 bay devices, realised via maximum 4 MCP assemblies consisting of - 1 communication processor MCP or - 1 communication processor MCP and - 1 XC2 expansion module. PROFIBUS DP interfaces, e.g. integrated on the CPU to connect bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface.
16
1.3 System Capacity
Substation interfaces
The protocol for substation connection

q
IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED)
requires interface standard RS232 or RS422 (RS485). Substations are connected to the MCP and XC2 modules of the MCP assemblies.
q
A maximum of 32 small substations with - - maximum 100 items of information each or a large substation with maximum 2000 items of information can be connected per MCP module.. With an MCP assembly, a maximum number of 4 interfaces can work in the polling mode (lines). A maximum number of 16 substations are managed per line.
q q
Combinations of the above examples are possible, however, the number of 10 000 information points and maximum 96 bay devices should not be exceeded. MPI Interface On the CPU, there is 1 MPI port (multipoint Token Ring bus topology) which can be used for configuration, parameterization and connection of SICAM Diamond.
17
1.3.3
Environmental Conditions
The SICAM eRTU Controller must not be used in any other than industrial environment.
Caution: The following specifications apply to the modules described in this manual. They do not generally apply to the standard SIMATIC modules. If you have any questions concerning one of the latter modules, please contact your local Siemens distributor.
Table 1-1
Environmental conditions for the SICAM eRTU Controller

No-fan operation Degree of protection Ambient air temperature for uninterrupted duty relative humidity Storage temperature Climatic category, corresponding to Yes IP54 or IP20 (depending on the freestanding cabinet) 0 C to 55 C max. 95%rel
Environmental conditions
-40 C to +70 C
IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3 +5 to +40 C 0.5 C/min 5 to 85 %rel 1 to 25 g/m3 None 70 to 106 kPa 700 W/m2 1.0 m/s none none none
ambient temperature temperature fluctuation relative humidity absolute humidity Condensation atmospheric pressure solar radiation air movement wind-driven precipitation water (except rain) ice formation
18
1.4 Expandability
1.4
Expandability
SICAM has been designed for a new generation of devices and function blocks for automating power supply switchgear. SICAM integrates compatible product lines which complement each other, and constitutes the consequent next step of development of fieldproven, widely-available components. Thanks to its open system design, the SICAM eRTU can easily be adapted to growing requirements in the future. System expansions and upgrades can be realized without any problems for:
q q q
Bay devices Protocols SIMATIC standard input/output modules
19
20
Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU

Overview The basic components of SICAM eRTU are those hardware components which are necessary for power supply, control and communication of the input/output modules. This includes also the free-standing cabinet and the racks. This chapter gives you a short description of the functional scope and the technical specifications of the modules. For the environmental conditions, please refer to Chapter 1.3.3. The accessories and spare parts are not included in this documentation. A list of these components can be found in SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design /16/.
Contents
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
Mounting of the Cabinet Racks Power Supply CPU (Central Processing Unit) MCP Communications Assembly IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack
22 28 31 35 46 69
21
2 Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU
2.1
2.1.1
Mounting of the Cabinet

Description of Free-Standing Cabinet
The free-standing cabinet is a closed steel-sheet cabinet with central grounding point and front door for individual or side-by-side mounting.
q q q q q
Properties
Degree of protection IP 54/IP 20 RAL 7032 for covering plates Fixed-level mounting with brackets Cable entry in base plate Prepared for accommodation of extra accessories via C profile mounting.
Rack
A free-standing cabinet can accomodate

q q
2 racks in fan-free operation 3 racks if adequate ventilation is provided.
The central rack is always installed in bottom position. Power supply terminal unit SVA All supply voltages of the free-standing cabinet are conducted across the power supply terminal unit . The central unit is supplied via a main miniature circuit-breaker (mcb) and two subordinate mcbs in 2-pole design with auxiliary signaling contact for digital input and output modules. Depending on the degree of expansion, the terminal unit can be extended. A mains filter is not provided.
End terminal
Main miniature circuit breaker (e. g. 10 A) (2-pole with aux. contact)
1 A miniature circuit breaker (for all CO 6MD1022) (1-pole with aux. contact) 1 A miniature circuit breaker (each for 4 DI 6MD1021) (1-pole with aux. contact) End terminal
PE conductor terminals
PE conductor terminals
suc011f
Fig. 2-1
Example of the design of the power supply terminal unit SVA
22
2.1 Mounting of the Cabinet
Section A - B
s p b
g p
INTF
i k p
s
ANT
SIMAT IC
SINAUT
SITOP
power 5
l
m
n r
Section C - D
g h i k l n p r a b c Central rack Expansion rack Eyebolt d e f Fault indicator with test key Cabinet lamp Door contact s t u
Cable duct space Router Modem with power supply Load power supply Cable holder Cable support and shielding bus Cable fastening and shielding bus Heating Heating programmer Opening in bottom plate (cable entry) Central grounding point
suc207.wmf
m Power supply interface SVA
Fig. 2-2
Example of a free-standing SICAM eRTU cabinet
23
Connecting cables
For logistic reasons only shielded cables are used. Of the input/output modules, only the nur analog modules AI16 and AI32 need a shield, which is already provided. The cables used for connecting the MCP have double shields. For more details, see SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions /17/. For mounting FO cables, two-sheath spiral flexible cords with a diameter of 32/40 mm (outside/inside diameter) are provided.
q q
Maximum fitting: Mounting: the
24 FO conductor pairs At the cable support buses in the area of cable ducts.
Mechanical construction
The system has interfaces to the MCP communications processor. The type of connection may differ from the basic variant, e.g.:
q q
Basic variant: MCP interfaces:
Direct connection of modules at terminals
Lighting cabinet
Optionally, the cabinet can be equipped with a 230 V AC lighting with service socket-outlet and a 6 A mcb (2-pole). This arrangement can be expanded for use with other 230 V AC applications.
24
2.1.2
Table 2-1
Technical Specifications of the Free-Standing Cabinet

Technical specifications (overview) of the SICAM eRTU/RTU standard cabinet Free-standing cabinet
Dimensions and weight
Dimension [W H D]
800 mm 2200 mm
600 mm

Material
Weight with one rack with two racks
ca. 170 kg ca. 200 kg
Sheet metal Frame Top and bottom rails Door, walls, covering plates Coating
2.5 mm 4.0 mm 1.5 mm Epoxy-polyester-powder for indoor mounting acc. to IEC 60721-3 Class 3K3
Coating
Color

Door
Frame, top rails and bottom rails Door, walls, covering plates Zierblende
RAL 7022 (gravel grey) RAL 7032 (pebble grey) SN 617 (petrol) right-handed
Front door hinge Acceptance angle
Single mounting Serial mounting
180 150 Espagnolette lock and two-way key acc. to DIN 43668-C35 (optional safety lock barrel) E.g. modem via C-profile mounting wire-mesh shield
Door lock
Mounting of extra accessories Connecting cables
Possible Copper cables LWL-cable Design Inside diameter Outside diameter Max.fitting
Spiral flexible cords, two-sheath 32 mm 40 mm 24 conductor pairs
Power supply
Fusing Design Expandability
1 main mcb, 2-pole, 16 A, 2 mcbs, 2-pole for signalling-circuit voltage and command output voltage Mcb expansion kit, 2 A, with auxiliary contact
25
2.1.3
Wall-Mounting Case
The standard wall mounting case is only used for installation of the SICAM eRTU. This closed sheet steel housing with central grounding point and fromt door can accommodate one SICAM eRTU rack with nine slots, for of which for process inputs/outputs. The cable entry is at the bottom.
Technical specifications
q q q q q q q q
Sheet steel housing without trim strip Wall mounting bracket Mounting plate Front door with right-handed hinge Flange plate in the housing bottom Dimensions in mm: Degree of protection: 600 x 380 x 350 (H x W x D) IP54
Material thickness (steel sheet): Housing 1.5 mm Mounting plate 2.5 mm Door 1.75 mm Colour: Mounting plate.......... Housing Varnish: RAL 2000 (yellow-orange) RAL 7032 (gravel gray) Housing and doors have a dip base coating and a powder-coating finish two-way key DIN 43668-C35) approx. 45 kg
q q
Door lock Weight with central rack
26
(mm) 600
Wandgehuse WG1 - WG1 - Front Wall-mounting case Frontansicht view A
Schnitt A - A Cross-sectionB - B
0XX0 00 0-0 XX0 0
CP x xx
500
RUN STOP
400
a
300
SICAM RTU
200
100
b c
0 B
d
0
100
200
300
mm
100
200
300 mm
a Central rack b Power supply terminal unit SVA c Mounting plate d Cable entry (option)
suc208f
Fig. 2-3
Example of the design of a SICAM eRTU in a wall-mounting case
27
2.2
2.2.1
Racks
UR1/UR2 Racks
The UR1/UR2 racks serve for accommodating the individual modules of the SICAM eRTU. The communication between the modules is done via the backplane bus. Via this bus they are also connected with the power supply module. In addition, the racks are equipped with a K bus.
Rack with 18 slots
UR1 rack
Separable Connection between M and module rack
K-bus connector
Chassis for ground connection
465 482.5 (approx. 19")
Plastic parts
(serve e.g. as guide pieces when swinging the modules into position)
Cover panels for bus connector

(unoccupied slots serve for covering)
SUC086f
Fig. 2-4
Design and dimensions of the UR1 rack
The UR1 rack with 18 slots is suitable both for fixed mounting and for swing-frame mounting. Its dimensions correspond to the 19" standard format.
28
190 290
P-bus connector
2.2 Racks
UR2 rack
The UR2 rack with 9 slots is suitable for small-system assemblies.
Rack with 9 slots

Plastic parts (serve e.g. as guide pieces when swinging the modules into position)
Separable connection between M and module rack
190 290 Cover panels for bus connector (unoccupied slots serve for covering) 240 257,5
suc087f
Chassis for ground connection
Fig. 2-5
UR2 rack
Separable connection
The racks are supplied with a separable electrical connection between the internal reference potential M of the modules and the rack. Behind this connection, there is an RC network (6.8 nF/10 MW) for ungrounded mounting. The full-length bus systems make it possible to equip the racks without any assembly rules. The only exceptions are: The PS power supply module. It must be plugged at the very left of the rack into slots 1-3. The IM (Interface Modules) for rack connection must be plugged in at the very right of the rack, if required.
Assembly
Power supply
The modules which are plugged into the rack are supplied with the necessary operating voltages by the PS power supply module via the backplane PCB. The connection is made via the backplane connectors.
29
I/O bus (P Bus)
The I/O bus (P bus) is a parallel backplane bus which is designed for high-speed exchange of I/O signals. Each rack has a P bus. The timecritical access to the process data of the signal modules is handled via the P bus. The communications bus (K bus) is a serial backplane bus which is designed for high-speed exchange of large data volumes parallel to the I/O signals. The K bus is necessary for all SICAM eRTU modules. The standard SIMATIC input/output modules do not use the K bus.
Communications bus (K bus)
2.2.2
Table 2-2
Technical data
Technical specifications of the UR1/UR2 racks UR1 UR2
Dimensions and weight (without modules)
Dimensions [W H D] Weight
482.5 mm 290 mm 3 kg 18
27.5 mm
257.5 mm 290 mm 27.5 mm 1.5 kg 9 Full-length K bus and P bus
Features
Number of slots Bus systems
Full-length K bus and P bus
30
2.3 Power Supply
2.3
2.3.1
Power Supply
PS Modules
The PS power supply module supplies the internal supply voltages (5 V DC, 24 V DC) of the SICAM eRTU by way of the backplane bus. Both output voltages are monitored. Upon failure of one of these voltages, the power supply module reports a fault to the CPU and activates the corresponding LED indicator at the front panel (see Figure 2-6). There are power supply modules for the following input voltage ranges available:
q q
24 V / 48 V / 60 V DC 110 to 250 V DC / 120 to 230 V AC Note:
Note: The PS power supply module does not provide any load voltages for modules.
Properties
The input voltage is isolated. Thus either P(+) or P(-) can be grounded.
q q q
The outputs are short-circuit proof. The inrush current is limited according to NAMUR Recommendation, Part 1, dated December 1990. On AC power supply modules, input and output are safely isolated acc. to IEC 61131-2.
31
Front view of the PS module
PS 20A DC 48/20
Fixing screws
2 3
s
INTF
Status and fault indications
BATT1F BATT2F BAF DC5V DC24V
FMR
FMR button (Failure Message Reset)
Standby switch
Snap-on mechanism for cover

BATT 1 BATT 2
Battery compartment (The SICAM eRTU does not need any backup batteries)
2 BATT OFF 1 BATT
Switch BATT INDIC
Blanking plate
Designation with AC variant L1 N PE
L+ LPE
Guide for terminal block 3-pin connector for power supply Plug coding Fixing screws
SUC017f
Fig. 2-6
Front view of the PS power supply module
32
2.3 Power Supply
The LED indicators of all PS modules have the same meanings:

Table 2-3 LED
INTF on BATT1F BATT2F BAF DC5V DC24V red red red red green green
LED indicators of the PS power supply module Colour Signification

Internal PS fault Back-up battery 1 fault Back-up battery 2 fault Battery voltage fault at backplane bus (insufficient) 5 V DC output voltage lies within the tolerance limits. 24 V DC output voltage lies within the tolerance limits.
Back-up battery
The power supply modules have a battery compartment which can accommodate two back-up batteries.
Note: The SICAM eRTU does not require any retentive data in order to restart after a mains failure, i. e. it is not necessary to insert back-up batteries.
The maximum back-up time depends on the load on the back-up battery. With two batteries inserted and a battery capacity of 60 % of the nominal capacity, the following back-up times are reached: Imax 200 mA Imax 4 mA back-up time approx. 250 days back-up time approx. 12.5 days
The maximum back-up current is 4 mA. The back-up batteries are standard AA type lithium batteries with a nominal voltage of 3.6 V and a nominal capacity of 2 Ah.
2.3.2
Battery Monitoring
Switch positions of the BATT INDIC switch:
q q
If you want to monitor only one back-up battery, set the switch to the 1BATT position. If you want to monitor two back-up batteries, set the switch to the 2BATT position. Technical Specifications
33
2.3.3
Technical Data
The following table details the technical data of the PS power supply module. The power supply module must be protected by a 10 A mcb. For further details on the environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3.
Table 2-4
Technical specifications of the PS power supply module PS 6EP8090-0*A00
Dimensions [W H D] Weight
75 mm 290 mm 210 mm 1.5 kg DC 24 V / 48 V / 60 V or DC 110 to 250 V / AC 120 to 230 V 19.2 to 71 V or 88 to 288 V 3.6 VSS 165 W 0 to +60 C (from > 60 C, reduction of the output power by 2.5 %/K) 40 C to +70 C IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation 100,000 hours
Voltage supply
Rated voltage Urated Supply voltage range Admissible ripple of the voltage supply Maximum power consumption
Ambient air temperature during uninterrupted duty During transportation / storage Climate MTBF for uninterrupted duty at 80 % of rated load and an average temperature of 40 C
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electrical isolation Isolation test voltage between input and output between input and ground between output and ground Radio interference level Output current at DC 5 V DC 24 V Residual ripple (DC 5 V)
Input and output voltages
2.5 kVeff 2.5 kVeff 500 Veff
Emitted interference Output
EN 55022, Class B
20 A, short-circuit proof 1 A, short-circuit proof
50 mV

Indications, interrupts, diagnostics
Mains buffering time at rated load at 50 % of rated load Status / fault indications
20 ms 50 ms
4 red and 2 green LEDs
34
2.4 CPU (Central Processing Unit)
2.4
2.4.1
CPU (Central Processing Unit)

CPU Modules
The openness of the SICAM eRTU design is enhanced by the use of CPUs with memory cards. The station size and the customer-specific functions which are implemented determine the computing power requirements to be met by the CPUs. For the SICAM eRTU, CPU modules with different performance characteristics are available:
q q q q q q q
CPU 412-1 (96 kbytes; 0.2 ms) CPU 412-2 (144 kbytes; 0.2 ms) CPU 414-2 (256 kbytes; 0.1 ms) CPU 414-3 (768 kbytes; 0.1 ms) CPU 416-2 (1.6 Mbytes; 0.08 ms) CPU 416-3 (3.2 Mbytes; 0.08 ms) CPU 417-4 (4 Mbytes; 0.1 ms)
This makes it possible to provide the required system resources. Both CPUs are fan-free, so that the maintenance time and cost is minimized accordingly. Note: You will find more information on the modules in the Internet at https://mall.ad.siemens.com/WW/guest
35
Front view of the CPU module
The operator and display elements are arranged in the same way on all CPUs.
CPU 41x-x X
6ES7 41x-xxxxx-0AB0
Status and fault indication

INTF EXTF BUS1F BUS2F
not with CPU 412-1 Slot for Memory Card
FRCE
RUN STOP
RUN-P RUN
RUN STOP
Mode selector switch
STOP MRES
MPI Interface
P5V2 N.C. RxD / TxD-N N.C.
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5
N.C. N.C. RxD / TxD-P RTS M5V2
X1 MPI/DP
N.C. = not occupied
not with CPU 412-1
X2 DP
Plus
EXT.-BATT.
Minus
5 ... 15 V DC
Jack connector 2.5mm Supply external battery

suc205
Fig. 2-7
Front view of the CPU 412-1, 414-2 and 416-2
36
Each central processing unit provides shock-hazard protection through a module enclosure, consisting of shell and cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection). Warning: Do not remove the module enclosure: Touching the components might cause electrostatic discharges which may eventually lead to destruction of the module.
The LED indicators of all CPUs have the same meanings:

Table 2-5 LED
INTF EXTF BUS1F BUS2F FRCE IFM1 RUN STOP red red red red yellow red green yellow
LED indicators of the CPUs Colour Meaning

Internal fault (on the CPU) External fault (outside the CPU) Bus fault Bus fault, not with CPU 412-1 Force job Fault on interface module 1 RUN status STOP status
In addition to the indicators, each CPU is provided with test and information functions which can be selected with STEP 7.
37
Status indicators
The two LEDs RUN and STOP inform about the currently active CPU operational status.
LED
RUN STOP RUN STOP
Status
on off off on CPU is in RUN status
Meaning
CPU is in STOP status. The user program is not executing. Warm restart/reset are possible. If the STOP was caused by a fault, the fault indicator (INTF or EXTF) is set additionally. CPU is in the DEFECTIVE status. The LEDs INTF, EXTF and FRCE flash additionally. STOP status caused by test function
RUN STOP RUN STOP RUN STOP
flashing flashing flashing on flashing on
A warm restart/reset was initiated. Depending on the length of the OB, it may last one minute or longer until the warm restart/ reset is executed. If the CPU does not go into RUN status even then, this may, e.g., be due to a system configuration error. General reset requested by CPU
RUN STOP RUN STOP
x flashing x flashing
General reset running
x = LED status is irrelevant
38
Fault indicators
The three LEDs INTF, EXTF and FRCE on the CPU front panel inform you about faults, errors and particular events during the execution of the application program..
LED
INTF
Status
on
Meaning
An internal fault was detected (programming or parameterization error) An external fault was detected (i.e. a fault whose cause is not located on the CPU) A Force task is active
EXTF
on
FRCE
on
The two LEDs BUS1F and BUS2F indicate faults concerning the MPI/DP and the PROFIBUS DP interface.
LED
BUS1F BUS2F BUS1F BUS2F BUS1F BUS2F BUS1F BUS2F
Status
on x flashing x x on x flashing
Meaning
A fault has been detected on the MPI/DP interface.
One or more slaves on PROFIBUS DP interface 1 do not respond. A fault has been detected on the PROFIBUS DP interface 2.
One or more slaves on PROFIBUS DP interface 2 do not respond.
x = LED status is irrelevant
The CPUs 41x-3 have the LED IFM1F. This LED indicates faults regarding the first module interface.
LED
IFM1F IFM1F
Status
on flashing
Meaning
A fault has been detected on module interface 1. One or more slaves of the PROFIBUS DP interface module plugged into module slot 1 do not respond.
Mode selector switch
With the help of the mode selector switch, you can set the CPU to the following operating modes:
39
q q q q
RUN-PROGRAM RUN STOP HARDWARE RESET.
The mode selector switch is designed as key switch. The meanings of its different positions are explained in the table below. Table 2-6
Position
RUN-P
Switch positions of the mode selector switch

Purpose
On-line parameter modification
Comment
The CPU executes the application program or is idle. I/O access is possible. The key cannot be removed in this position. With the help of the programming device, programs can be: read out from the CPU (CPU PG) downloaded to the CPU (PG CPU). The CPU executes the application program or is idle. I/O access is possible. The key can be removed in this position, so that no unauthorized person can change the operating mode. With the help of the programming device, programs can be read out from the CPU (CPU PG). The program in the load memory cannot be modified in the RUN operating mode! (See STEP 7 user manual) The CPU does not execute the application program. The digital I/O modules cannot be accessed. The key can be removed in this position, so that no unauthorized person can change the operating mode. With the help of the programming device, programs can be read out from the CPU (CPU PG) and/or downloaded to the CPU (PG CPU). Pushbutton position of the key switch for a software-controlled reset of the CPU.
RUN
Normal operation
STOP
No operation or program loading
MRES
Hardware reset
Note: After having downloaded the configured data, please cause the SICAM eRTU to start by switching the CPU off and then on again. When you parameterize the CPU set Restart or Cold restart as a startup option. The Hot restart causes operating status STOP.
For further information on how to change the operational status, please refer to SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 /1/. For more information on the switch positions during commissioning and operation of the SICAM eRTU, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions /17/.
40
MPI interface X1
The MPI (Multi-Point-Interface) allows to connect up to 15 (Token Ring bus) stations to the CPU without using any other modules with networking capability. Only bus connectors or PG cables are needed for connection. Devices which can be connected include e.g.:
q
Programming devices (PG/PC) When communicating with PGs, a CPU can hold several online connections simultaneously, one of which is reserved for a PG. SICAM Diamond OP/MP text display (optional)
q q
Note: For further details on how to modify default settings, please refer to: SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 /1/
Supply via external battery
At the EXT.-BATT. jack of the CPU, you can apply a direct voltage ranging from 5 to 15 V for
q q q
backing up an application program which you have stored on a DRAM. holding data on the CPU as retentive, such as data blocks, flags, timers, counters or the internal clock. saving the fault image on the communications processor.
The maximum rated current is 5 mA.
Note: The system concept of the SICAM eRTU has been designed to work without batteries thus guaranteeing freedom from maintenance! Data back-up using battery supply is optional and is a standard feature of the standard SIMATIC modules.
41
Memory Cards
The CPU is operated exclusively with memory cards in the SICAM eRTU. Memory cards are used like floppy disks in a PC and guarantee high flexibility: The operating system is booted from the memory card. User software and user data are exchanged via the memory card. User software and user data are not deleted in case of a mains failure.
Caution: If the supply voltage of the SICAM eRTU fails during a write access to the memory card, the entire contents of the memory card may be damaged under adverse circumstances.
42
2.4.2
Memory Card
Memory cards are retentive storage media. They are used for saving:
q q q q
the application program blocks station parameters which determine the behaviour of the SICAM eRTU parameters which determine the behaviour of the function modules. the configuration and parameterization of the STEP 7 project
If you order a memory card separately (e.g. as a spare part), you must load the application program and the parameters into the memory card with a PG or PC prior to commissioning.
SUC059f
Fig. 2-8
Memory card
Note: The memory card incorporates a FLASH EPROM. It does not require any voltage for storing its contents, i.e. the information contained on it will not be deleted when you remove the memory card from the CPU or when you operate your SICAM eRTU without back-up (i.e. without back-up battery in the power supply module or without an external back-up voltage being applied at the EXT.-BATT. jack of the CPU).
43
2.4.3
Technical Data
The CPUs comply with the CE standard and can be used in the environment defined there.
CPU Modules
Table 2-7
Technical specifications of the CPUs 412-2 and 414-2 CPU 412-2 CPU 414-2
Dimension [W H Weight
D]
50 mm 290 mm 210 mm appr. 720 g DC 24 V 1.5/1.6 A max 150 mA per interface 7.5 W 256 Kbyte RAM 64 Mbyte RAM / 64 Mbyte Flash EPROM 72/72 Kbyte 0.2 s 4096 256 256 yes IP 20 0 C to 60 C 128/128 Kbyte 0.1 s 8192 256 256
Supply voltage Power consumption
Nominal value Typ./max. power consumption DC 5 V Max. power consumption DC 24 V Typ. power loss
Load memory
Integrated Extensible memory card
Performance characteristics Program/data memory Command execution times per binary command Marker Counter Times Environmental conditions Fanless operation Degree of protection Ambient air temperature during uninterrupted duty Storage temperature Climate Electromagnetic compatibility Emitted interference Interfaces Interference immunity Radio interference acc. to EN 55022 MPI-Interface Transmission rate Signal level Voltage immunity Indications Control element Function and status indications
-40 C to +70 C
IEC 60721 Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation EN 50082-2 Limit class A (industrial environment) 9-pole sub D female connector 187.5 kbit/s RS485 0.5 kV LEDs Key switch
44
I/O address space
The I/O address space determines the maximum number of possible inputs/outputs: I/O address space requirements
q q
8 digital inputs/outputs: 1 Byte 1 analog input/output: 2 Byte
Memory card
The following table lists the technical specifications of the memory card. Table 2-8 Technical specifications of the memory card
Features
Dimensions [W x H x D] Weight EMC protection Memory capacity
FLASH Card
7.5 mm x 57 mm x 87 mm approx. 35 g Given by construction features 256 kByte to 16 MByte
Note: The memory capacity corresponds to the physical memory capacity. After formatting, 80 % of the memory capacity are available for storing data and programs.
45
2.5
MCP Communications Assembly

An MCP assembly consists of an MCP communications processor which can be expanded with up to 4 expansion modules. The user-specific combinations of an MCP assembly are described in Chapter 1.3.2. The MCP assembly performs the following functions: q Connection of bay devices via:
q q q
Features
RS232 (6 interfaces) fibre-optic cables (24 interfaces) RS422/RS485 (6 interfaces).
MCP 0XX0000-0XX00
XC2 X 2 X 3 4 CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA10
XC2 X X 2 3 4 CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA10
X 2 X 3 4 CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA00 P
MCP 0XX0000-0XX00
X 2 X 3 4 CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA00 P
XF6 0XX0000-0XX00
X 2 X 3 4 6MD1010-0BA20 P CP xxx
XF6 0XX0000-0XX00 X 2 X 3 4 6MD1010-0BA20 P CP xxx
XF6 0XX0000-0XX00
X 2 X 3 4 6MD1010-0BA20 P CP xxx
XF6 0XX0000-0XX00
X 2 X 3 4 6MD1010-0BA20 P CP xxx
INTF EXTF LOAD FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 RUN STOP FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1
INTF EXTF LOAD FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 RUN STOP R1 R1 R1 R1 T1 T1 T1 T1
RESET
RESET
T2
T2
T2
T2
R2
R2
R2
R2
SYNC
SYNC
T3
T3
T3
T3
R3
R3
R3
R3
T4
T4
T4
T4
R4
R4
R4
R4
X1
X1
X1
X1 T5 T5 T5 T5
R5
R5
R5
R5
T6
T6
T6
T6
R6 X2 X2 X2 X2
R6
R6
R6
MCP +2 x XC2
MCP + 4 x XF6
SUC137f
Fig. 2-9
Examples of maximum configurations of MCP assemblies
46
2.5 MCP Communications Assembly
Connection to higher-level control centres via

q q q
RS232 (6 interfaces) RS422/RS485 (6 interfaces with IEC 60870-5-101). X21 (6 interfaces with IEC 60870-5-101). RS232 (6 interfaces) RS422/RS485 (6 interfaces).
Communication with substations via:

q q
MCP 0XX0000-0XX00 X 2 X 3 4 CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA00 P
XC2 X 2 X 3 4 CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA10
INTF EXTF LOAD FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 RUN STOP FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1
RESET
SYNC
X1
X1
X2
X2
MCP + 1 x XC2
suc136f
Fig. 2-10 MCP assembly for communication to higher-level control centres
47
Synchronization, using one of the following time signal receivers

q q q
DCF77 GPS IRIG-B
When the GPS time signal is used, channel 6 and the interface X1 (RS232) of the MCP communications processor are occupied automatically when configuring is done with SICAM plusTOOLS.
q
Synchronization can also be done with a telegram.
Processing principle
The controller of the MCP communications processor handles the central management functions for communication between the SICAM eRTU on the one hand and the connected bay devices, substations, and higherlevel control centres on the other hand. The communications processor provides two serial interfaces which can be parameterized optionally as RS232 or RS422/RS485. If you need more connections, you can use the XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules in addition.
2.5.1
MCP Communications Processor

The MCP communications processor accommodates the controller. It is connected to both the P bus and the K bus via the backplane bus connector. With the XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules (if applicable), the MCP communications processor communicates via a lateral connector. The communications processor has a 2-pin connector for connecting a time signal receiver. It can act both as clock master and as clock slave. The MCP software is responsible for
q q q q
protocol and information conversion clock synchronization of the devices general interrogation of the devices the startup procedure of all connected devices.
48
Dongle
The MCP module carries on its back a dongle to prevent illicit copying of the software. For plugging and unplugging the dongle, the module must be removed. Depending on the authorized software, 8 dongles are available: The following options for combination of the transmission protocols can be supplied either with or without CFC functionality.
q q
Dongle for all permissible protocols - comprises the protocols of all dongles listed below Dongle for the standard protocols IEC 60870-5-101 Master/Slave, IEC 60870-5-103, SINAUT 8-FW Slave, DNP V3.0 Master/Slave, TELEGYR 800 Slave and TELEGYR 8979 Slave Dongle for third-party protocols and standard protocols IEC 60870-5-101 Master, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP V3.0 Master Dongle for the protocols IEC 60870-5-104 Slave, IEC 60870-5-101 Master/Slave, IEC 60870-5-103, SINAUT 8-FW Slave, DNP V3.0 Master/Slave, TELEGYR 800 Slave and TELEGYR 8979 Slave
Note: Order information about the different dongle variants is given in SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design /16/.
49
Front view of the MCP
MCP X 2 X 3 4 6MD1010-0BA00
INTF EXTF LOAD FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 RUN STOP
LED functions Internal MCP fault External fault Downloading Fault 1 X1 interface Transmit data Receive data Fault 2 Transmit data X2 interface Receive data Application program running Application program stopped
RESET
Synchronization input
SYNC
2 1
Ext. Synchronization (-) Ext. Synchronization (+)
X1 interface
X1
Cover
X2 interface
X2
SUC088f
Fig. 2-11 Front view of the MCP communications processor
50
Enclosure
The MCP communications processor provides shock-hazard protection through a module enclosure consisting of an enclosure shell and an enclosure cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection).
q q q
Controller
Controller type QUICC 68360 by Motorola Clock frequency 25 MHz internal interfaces 6 interfaces (channel 1 to 6), which are connected to the internal interface bus (S bus).
Boot EPROM
Flash EPROM
Memory type 512k*8 Memory capacity 512 kByte, Bus width 8 Bit
The boot EPROM contains the basic firmware which is required for initializing the controller and for downloading the firmware to the program memory. Program memory
4 EPROMs:
Memory type 29F040, Memory capacity 0.5 MByte each, Bus width 32 Bit Memory type 29F040, Memory capacity 0.5 MByte each, Bus width 16 Bit
2 Flash EPROMs:
The memory modules are wired in, i.e. the memory capacity is predetermined by the manufacturer. Data memory
4 SRAMs:
Memory type 512k*8 Memory capacity 2 MByte, Bus width 32 Bit
The memory modules are wired in, i.e. it is not possible to modify the memory capacity once the modules have been delivered to the customer. Bus connector The MCP communications processor is equipped with two 5-row backplane bus connectors for connection to the K bus and the P bus.
51
Connector for MCP assembly
A connector at the right side of the MCP communications processor serves for connecting the XC2 and/or XF6 expansion module (see Chapter 2.5.4 and Chapter 2.5.5). The Sbus and Xbus connection between the communications processor and the expansion modules is realized independently of the Pbus and the Kbus. Via the S bus, the external interfaces of the XC2 and XF6 expansion modules are connected to one of the 6 channels of the communications processor controller. Which external interface is to communicate with which channel of the controller is determined during the hardware configuration of the MCP assembly combinations. For details on how to proceed, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/. Via the X bus, the communications processor controller handles the control of the serial multiplexers of the MCP, XC2 and XF6 modules. On the front panel of the MCP communications processor, there are 11 light-emitting diodes for status and fault indications of the module.
S bus
X bus
52
Table 2-9 LED

INTF EXTF LOAD FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 RUN STOP
LED indicators of the MCP Colour

red red yellow red green green red green green green yellow
Meaning
Internal fault (on the MCP) External fault (outside the MCP) Downloading Fault 1 Transmit data Receive data Fault 2 Transmit data Receive data Application program running Application program stopped X2 interface X1 interface
LED patterns during start-up
During the CPU start-up, the following LED patterns are visible:
LED
INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP
Status
on on off on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on
Meaning
Reset, hardware initialization
LED check
53
LED
INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP
Status
on off off off on off off off off off off on off off off on flashing (0.5 Hz) off off off off off on off off off on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on
Meaning
Start of the boot system
RAM check, duration approx. 5 s for every 512 kbytes
RAM check o.k.
MCP is in STOP status, start-up is complete.
54
LED patterns during firmware loading
While the firmware is being downloaded, the following LED patterns are visible on the MCP communications processor:
LED
INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP
Status
off off flashing (0.5 Hz) off off off off off off off on off off flashing (2 Hz) off off off off off off off on off off flashing (5 Hz) off off off off off off off on
Meaning
MCP waiting for download start
Receiving data
Installation
55
Loading the system data
While the configuration data (system data) are being loaded, the LOAD LED of the MCP communications processor shines continuously.
LED
INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP INTF EXTF LOAD FL1 TxD1 RxD1 FL2 TxD2 RxD2 RUN STOP
Status
off off flashing (0.5 Hz) off off off off off off off on off off flashing (2 Hz) off off off off off off off on off off flashing (5 Hz) off off off off off off off on
Meaning
MCP waiting for download start
Receiving data
Installation
Fault indicators
The TxD1, .., RxD2 LEDs are used for issuing fault codes. In case of a fault, contact your system service technician or the after-sales service. Tell him exactly which of these LEDs are shining.
56
Reset
With the help of the reset pushbutton, the MCP communications processor can be reset. The pushbutton is not used during normal operation, but serves as a tool for fault diagnostics. In order to exclude unintentional resets, the pushbutton is recessed and can only be pressed using a pointed object. The reset pushbutton is pressed when downloading the MCP firmware. For more detailed information, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions /17/.
Clock synchronization
The 2-pin synchronization input at the front panel serves for receiving an external time signal for clock synchronization. As signal transmitter, either DCF77, GPS or IRIG-B can be used. Two 25-pin interfaces at the front panel of the module serve for connecting the lines to bay devices / substations, or to a higher-level control centre. X1 and X2 can be parameterized as RS232 or RS422/RS485 interfaces.
Interfaces X1 / X2
The pins which are not used for operation as RS232 interface must remain unconnected. Reason: In addition to the RS232 signals, RS422/RS485 drivers are implemented on the interface signals, so that data can also be transmitted with the RS422/RS485 signal levels as an alternative (see Table 2-10).
57
2.5.2
25-Pin RS232 Interface

X1 or X2 (see Figure 2-11) can be parameterized as RS232 interface. The following table shows the pin assignment of the socket connector:
Table 2-10
Pin assignment of the RS232 interface Pin

25 24 23 22
Interface
Signal
*
DIN
* (T) * (M3) * (S1.2) * *
Pin
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Signal
* * * * * DCD GND DSR CTS RTS RxD TxD
DIN
* * * * * (M5) (E2) (M)* (M2) (S2) (D2) (D)
TSTout * CI * DTR *
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
RST
(T4) *
TSTin *
(T2) *
* On these pins, RS422/RS485 drivers are implemented, do not connect!
The outputs of the 25-pin RS232 interface are switched to a highresistance state after startup. If they are not configured, they will remain in this high-resistance state. Line lengths The data transmission rate depends on the length of the line which is connected. According to the V.28 recommendation, the maximum line length is 15 m.
58
2.5.3
25-Pin RS422/RS485 Interface

The RS422/RS485 interface supplies signals for synchronous data transmission according to X.21 as well. The RS422/RS485 interface can be parameterized in such a way that also half-duplex mode according to RS485 is possible.
The pins which are not used for operation as RS422/RS485 interface must remain unconnected. Reason: In addition to the RS422/RS485 signals, RS232 drivers are implemented on the interface signals, so that data transmission can be realized also with the RS232 signal levels as an alternative (see Table 211).
The outputs of the RS422/RS485 interface are switched to a highresistance state after startup. They are activated by the software of the module and are switched again to a high-resistance state, if necessary. Terminating resistor In order to enable also bus operation in the RS422/RS485 operating mode, each of the two signal lines is provided with a pull-up and a pulldown resistor which are active during RS485 operation.
Pullup / pulldown resistors which can be MCP, can be connected via Sermux register 5V
MCP
5 V IED
5 V IED
IED 5 V
1.5 kW R_A
1.5 kW
1.5 kW
1.5 kW
Transmit/Receive A Terminating resistor Transmit/Receive B R_B 1.5 kW 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
Terminating resistor at the 1. first and the last station normally 100-120 W (minimum 54 W)
1.5 kW
mcp01.cdr
Fig. 2-12 Configuration of the terminating resistors
59
The maximum line length depends on the transmission rate (for details, please refer to DIN 19245, Volume 1). The necessary terminating resistor is calculated using the following formula:
1 1 1 ----- = ------- + --------------------- Z L Ra R1 + R2 1 Ra = --------------------------1 1 ------ --------------------Z L R1 + R2
R1 = 1.5 kW R2 = 1.5 kW
Z L = surge impedance of cable
+
R1 1, 5 kW
Ra
ZL
R2 1, 5 kW M
mcp02.cdr
Fig. 2-13 Determination of the terminating resistor
The terminating resistor has to be provided for in the cable connector!
60
Table 2-11
Pin assignment of the RS422/RS485 interface Pin

25 24 23
Interface
Signal
S_A
*
Pin
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
Signal
T_B R_A R_B I_A I_B * * * * * * *
S_B * C_A * C_B
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
5 4
* T_A
3 2 1
* On these pins, RS232 drivers are implemented. For operation as RS422 interface, only pin 11 to pin 14 are used For operation as RS485 interface, only pin 11 to pin 12 are used.
Line lengths/ transmission rates
The transmission rate depends on the length of the line which is connected.
Table 2-12 Line lengths/transmission rates Line length [m]
1000 500
Transmission rate [kbps]

9,6 19,2
61
2.5.4
XC2 Expansion Module
Front view of XC2
XC2 X2 X 3 4 6MD1010-0BA10
LED functions Fault 1 Transmit data Receive data Fault 2
FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2
X1 interface
Transmit data
Receive data
X2 interface
X1 interface
X1
Cover
X2 interface
X2
SUC089f
Fig. 2-14 Front view of the XC2
62
Enclosure
The XC2 expansion module provides shock-hazard protection through a module enclosure consisting of an enclosure shell and an enclosure cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection). The XC2 expansion module does not have an S7/M7 bus interface of its own. It uses the backplane bus only for the supply voltage and the slot address. Within the MCP assembly, the connection of the XC2 expansion module to the MCP communications processor or to another XC2 or an XF6 is realized with the help of plug-and-socket connectors located at the module sides. On the front panel, there are 6 light-emitting diodes which inform about the module status.
Table 2-13 LED
FAULT1 TXD1 RXD1 FAULT2 TXD2 RXD2 red green green red green green
Bus connector
Female connector for MCP assembly
LED indicators of the XC2 Colour

Fault 1 Transmit data Receive data Fault 2 Transmit data Receive data X2 interface X1 interface
Meaning
Interfaces X1 / X2
Two 25-pin interfaces at the front panel of the module serve for connecting the lines to bay devices or to higher-level control centres. Both the X1 and the X2 interface can be parameterized as RS232 or RS422/RS485 interfaces (see Page 57ff).
63
2.5.5
XF6 Expansion Module
Front view of the XF6

X 2 3 4 6MD1010-0BA20 CP xxx
Cover
T1
Transmit 1 Interface 1
R1
Receive 1
T2
R2
Receive 2
T3
R3
Receive 3
T4
R4
Receive 4
T5
R5
Receive 5
T6
R6
Receive 6
SUC090f
Fig. 2-15 Front view of the XF 6
64
Enclosure
The expansion module provides shock-hazard protection through a module enclosure consisting of an enclosure shell and an enclosure cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection). The XF6 expansion module does not have an S7/M7 bus interface of its own. It uses the backplane bus only for the supply voltage and the slot address. Within the MCP assembly, the connection of the XF6 expansion module to the MCP communications processor or to an XC2 or XF6 is realized with the help of plug-and-socket connectors located at the module sides. Six fibre-optic interfaces at the front panel of the module serve for connecting bay devices. The wavelength is 820 nm. For each fibre-optic link, one connector pair consisting of transmitter and receiver is provided. The cables are connected using ST connectors. The connectors are locked with bayonet joints. The connectors have a downward inclination, so that the admissible bending radii can be complied with.
Bus connector
Connector for MCP assembly
Interfaces X1 to X6 Socket
Line lengths
Table 2-14 shows the admissible line lengths for the different types of fibre-optic cables.
.
Table 2-14
Admissible line lengths Fibre

Glass PCF Plastic
Length
1,500 m 500 m 3m
65
2.5.6
Modules
Technical Data
The MCP communications processor and its XC2 and XF6 expansion modules comply with the CE standard and can be used in the environment defined there. For further details on the environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3.
Technical specifications of the MCP communications processor and its expansion modules MCP 6MD10100BA00 /CC XC2 6MD10100BA10 XF6 6MD10100BA20
Table 2-15
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions [W H D] Weight 870 g
25 mm 290 mm 210 mm 800 g 5 V DC 0,25 V 1A 5W QUICC 68360 of Motorola 128 kbyte 4 512 kbyte (EPROM, 32 bit) 2 512 KByte (EPROM, 16 bit) 4 512 KByte (SRAM) 0.5 A 2.5 W 0.3 A 1.5 W 670 g
Ratings
Rated voltage Max. power consumption Power loss
Features
Processor Boot-EPROM capacity Program memory capacity
Data memory capacity Synchronization input 0 input signal level 1 input signal level Input current Delay 0 1 Delay 1 0 Interface Transmission rate Signal level
RS232 or RS422/RS485 (X.21) ST
to 19.2 kbit/s
+0 V to +1 V +4 V to 5 V
6.5 mA to 12 mA (input level 1) 3 ms (typical) 3 ms (typical)
50 bit/s to 115.2 kbit/s RS232 or RS422/RS485 (X.21)
Connector Environmental conditions Ambient air temperature during uninterrupted duty During transport / storage Climate MTBF
ISO 2110 (25-pin) 0 C to +60 C -40 C to +70 C
IEC 60721 Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation 100 000 hours
66
Table 2-15
Technical specifications of the MCP communications processor and its expansion modules MCP 6MD10100BA00 /CC XC2 6MD10100BA10 XF6 6MD10100BA20
Electrical isolation Isolation test voltage between process inputs and electronics (acc. to IEC 60255-5) Rated voltage for determining the clearances and creepage distances (acc. to DIN VDE 0110) Surge voltage acc to IEC 60255-5, test category III Electrical fast transient (burst) EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4 Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5 Conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6 Radiated RF-EM field EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated EM field from digital radio telephones ENV 50204 Appendix to IEC 61000-4-3 (under discussion)
Input and output voltages 2.5 kVeff, 50 Hz, 1 min or 3.5 kV DC
250 V DC (overvoltage category / pollution degree III/2) max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms
Klasse 3: 2 kV with coupling damp Class 3: 2 kV asymmetrical, 1 kV symmetrical Class 3: 10 Vrms
Class 3: 10 V/m
Emitted interference Indications, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Radio interference level Status / fault indications 5 red, 1 yellow and 5 green LEDs
EN 55022 Class B 2 red and 4 green LEDs
When configuring and establishing connections via fibre optic cables, please observe the following values:
67
Table 2-16
Technical specifications of the fiber optic (FO) cables 6XV81000BB41/51-...

Outdoor cable (glass)
6XV81000BC41/51-...
Indoor cable (glass)
6XV81000EA41/51-...
Indoor cable (PCF)
Connector type Minimum bending radius during installation during operation
BFOC connectors on both sides / BFOC connector F-SMA connector 200 mm 150 mm 1600 N 1100 N 62.5/125 mm 80 mm 50 mm 200 N 130 N 50/125 mm 250 mm 850 nm 1,500 m 0.27 3.5 dB/km 400 MHz*km 0.2 3.0 dB/km 200 MHz*km 500 m 0.36 6 dB/km 17 MHz*km 80 mm 50 mm 270 N 90 N 200/230 mm 500 mm
Maximum tensile strain during installation during operation Diameter core/cladding Diameter of the first coating Wavelength Max. line length Numerical aperture Attenuation coefficient a Bandwidthdistance product
68
2.6 IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack
2.6
IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack

The IM interface modules serve for connecting the backplane bus of the central controller to that of the expansion racks. One interface module consists of:
q q q q
the send IM in the central controller the receive IM in the expansion rack the connecting line and the terminator.
Both the send and the receive IM have two front interfaces each, which serve for establishing the connecting lines to the partner modules. For connecting a maximum of 4 expansion units to the central controller, the following types of connection are available:
q q q q
Up to 4 expansion racks in series using a separate interface of the interface module for each line Each expansion rack via a separate interface module One expansion rack per line Combination of the above variants.
Caution: The different IM types are designed for certain maximum overall line lengths, which must be complied with under any circumstances (see Chapter 2.6.1 and Chapter 2.6.3).
69
2.6.1
IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 Interface Modules

The IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 interface modules (send/receive IM) can only be used for establishing local links (up to 5 m overall line length per line).
Send module IM 460-0 IM Receive module 461-0
The IM 460-0 is plugged into the central controller - always into the last slot (18 in the UR1 rack or 9 in the UR2 rack) - as send IM. The IM 461-0 is plugged into the last slot of the expansion rack as receive IM (X1 front connector) and send IM (X2 front connector, for serial connection of the expansion racks). With the help of a coding switch, the number of the expansion rack is set on this module. On the front panel of the IM 460-0 / 461-0, there are respectively 3 and 2 light-emitting diodes for status and fault indications of the module. The display elements of the send IM have the following meanings:
LED
EXTF
Status
on
Meaning
External fault: line 1 or 2 is disturbed (missing connection plug, wire break) Line 1 (via X1 front plug) is OK One module has not yet completed the initialization run. Line 2 (via X2 front plug) is OK One module has not yet completed the initialization run.
C1 C1 C2 C2
on flashing on flashing
The indicator elements of the receive IM have the following meaning:

LED
INTF
Status
on
Signification
Internal fault if: one rack number > 21 or = 0 was set, you have changed the rack number in an energized status

EXTF on
External fault if: Line disturbed, e.g. if the terminating resistor is not plugged,
one module has not yet completed the initialization run, or if the central device is switched off.
70
Terminator
On the last expansion rack of a line, the connecting line must be terminated properly. For that purpose, a terminator is plugged into the X2 front connector of the receive IM of that expansion rack. For connecting the individual interface modules, preassembled cables in different standard lengths are available (see SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design /16/). This female connector can be used to connect an external battery (5 V to 15 V) or a central back-up voltage supply when the power supply module in the rack is exchanged. Mind the mounting depth in the cabinet or wallmounting case when choosing the connector (if necessary, use a bent connector). As the SICAM eRTU system requires a backup battery only in the PS20A power supply module of the central rack, this female connector can remain unused.
Connecting cables
External battery supply
71
Front view of the IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 interface modules
Send IM
IM 460-0
X
6ES7460-0AA00
Receive IM
IM 461-0
X
6ES7461-0AA00
EXTF C1 C2
INTF EXTF
LED function: Internal IM fault (inadmissible rack No.) External fault (e.g. terminator missing) Line 1/2 (connection) okay
RACK
0 2
Coding switch Jack connector 2.5 mm External battery supply Positive Negative
EXT.-BATT.
5 ... 15 V DC
Connector for connecting cable from the upstream interface module
Connector for line 1

X1 X1
Connector for connecting cable to the downstream interface module or to the terminator
Connector for line 2

X2 X2
SUC016f
Fig. 2-16 Front view of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 interface modules
72
2.6.2
Technical Data
Technical specifications of the IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 interface modules IM 460-0 IM 461-0
Table 2-17
Dimensions (W H D) Weight 600 g 110 mA 0.7 W 500 Veff 2 line outputs 5m
25 mm 290 mm 210 mm 610 g 260 mA 1.45 W 500 Veff 1 line input 1 line output 5m
Power consumption
Power consumption Power loss
Environmental conditions Interfaces
Isolation test Front connector functions Max. line length
Table 2-18
Technical specifications of the IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 interface modules IM 460-3 IM 461-3
Dimensions (W H D) Weight 630 g 1550 mA 7.75 W 500 Veff 2 line outputs 102 m
25 mm 290 mm 210 mm 620 g 620 mA 3.1 W 500 Veff 1 line input 1 line output 102 m
Power consumption
Power consumption Power loss
Environmental conditions Interfaces
Isolation test Front connector functions Max. line length
2.6.3
IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 Interface Modules

The IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 interface modules (send/receive module) are used for establishing remote links (up to 102 m overall line length per line). It is important for you to know the exact line length and to indicate this variable when parameterizing the interface module. Any other regulations, properties and technical data apply according to Chapter 2.6.1 and Chapter 2.6.2.
73
74
Input / Output Modules

Overview This chapter describes the SICAM input/output modules which fulfil the specific requirements of telecontrol systems.
Contents
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
Module Design DI Digital Input Modules AI Analogue Input CO Command Output Module CR Command Release Module Status and Diagnostic Indications
76 78 86 95 105 118
75
3 Input / Output Modules
3.1
Module Design
Resolution Voltage immunity Input/output voltage 1 ms 2.5 kV 24 / 48 / 60 / 125 V
Requirements
Enclosure
The modules offer shock-hazard protection through a module enclosure consisting of an enclosure shell and an enclosure cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection). Warning It is not allowed to remove the module enclosure! The modules must not be mounted or commissioned without the module enclosure!
Front side
All function elements which are necessary for operation, mounting and service are arranged at the front panel. Input/output modules have a recessed 48-pin connector. In this recess, the front connector can be hung into a bearing, plugged in and screwed down. Two screws are provided for fixing the modules to the rack.
Front connector
The front connectors are available in the following designs:

q q q
Crimp contacts Screw-type contacts Spring-loaded terminals
The connection unit allows to connect flexible conductors with conductor cross-sections ranging from 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2. The number of conductors which can be stowed in the available cable space depends on the diameter of the conductors used. In general, the following rules are applicable:
q q
36 conductors with an outside diameter of 3.0 mm. 46 conductors with an outside diameter of 2.5 mm.
76
3.1 Module Design
a b c d e f m
g h l k Enclosure a Module enclosure b Ventilation slots Front side c Thread for front connector d Module designation and fixture e Status/fault indications f Signal status indications g Multipoint connector (48-pin) n Bearing for front connector Rear i Bus connector Front connector k Enclosure (optionally with screw-type contacts, crimp contacts or spring-loaded terminals) l Coding elements m Fixing screw for front connector n Labelling strip p Front cover (hinged) r Cable entry
SUC018f
Fig. 3-1
Mechanical components of an input/output module
77
3.2
DI Digital Input Modules

The DI digital input modules are suitable for acquiring and processing switch positions and other digital signals. The digital input modules convert the levels of external binary process signals to the internal signal level of the SICAM eRTU substation controller and process them. The modules are characterized especially by the following features and functions: q Spontaneous event capturing
q
The events which are captured depending on the parameterized processing type are written chronologically into the event buffer (EPE) with a resolution of 1 ms. The DI module issues a hardware interrupt (HWI) which causes the CPU to collect the data. The event buffer can hold 200 events. Keeping a process input image (PII). This process image can be read directly by the CPU. Single-point indication Fleeting indication Double-point indication Metered value Bitstrings Transformer tap indication Comparing the input voltage with the signaling-circuit voltage guarantees that the "0" and the "1" signal level are recognized reliably over the entire input voltage range. The "1" signal state is recognized when at least 80 % of the signaling-circuit voltage have been reached. Diagnostic indication, suppression of misinformation
Cyclic state capturing

q
Parameterizable processing types

q q q q q q
Safe acquisition of the signal states

q
Sensor for recognizing and monitoring the signaling-circuit voltage

q
78
3.2 DI Digital Input Modules
DI terminal connection diagram

Abbreviations: US x Signaling-circuit voltage (serves as reference voltage)
Input WL1 WL2 IND0 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND6 IND7 I0.0 I0.1 I0.2 I0.3 I0.4 I0.5 I0.6 I0.7 US0 UCP0 I1.0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 US1 UCP1 I2.0 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 US2 UCP2 I3.0 I3.1 I3.2 I3.3 I3.4 I3.5 I3.6 I3.7 US3 UCP3
UCPx Common potential of the 8 inputs INDx Ix.x Indication source Signal input of the module
IND8 IND9 IND10 IND11 IND12 IND13 IND14 IND15 -
PIN No. of the multipoint connector 1 Input DI 2 monitoring loop) (withdrawal 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Potential 48 isolation 2.5 kV
SUC003f
Fig. 3-2
Terminal connection diagram of the digital input module
79
3.2.1
Input Wiring
Each one of the inputs I0.0 to I3.7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The applied input voltage is compared to a reference voltage for each input group (I0.x to I3.x). This reference voltage is directly proportional to the applied signaling-circuit voltage (US0 to US3). If the input voltage present at inputs I0.0 to I3.7 exceeds approx. 80 % of the signaling voltage, the binary status 1 is detected.
% 100
Signal level
80
1 signal Signal profile 0 signal
0.25 ms Sampling time

0 0,5 1
1,5
2,5
t (ms)
Digital filter (shift register)
Parameterized filter time (here: 1 ms) Status change to "1" recognized: process change is processed Absolute time of change is calculated back to the beginning of the filter time.
SUC027
Fig. 3-3
Principle of operation of the input filter
This adaptive behaviour of the input level threshold ensures a reliable recognition of the "0" and the "1" signal level over the entire input voltage range.
4 I0.0 . . . PIN No. of the 11 13 12
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Analog multiplexer
Cycle Internal DI data bus Digital filter Test/ control logics
multipoint connector
I0.7 UCP0 US0
Uref
Comparator ASIC 5V Potential isolation 2.5 kV Hybrid
Terminals of the front connector
Voltage divider
DC
SUC140
Fig. 3-4
Input circuit of the DI module
80
3.2.2
Electrical Isolation
The internal electronics of the DI module is isolated against the signaling circuits by optocoupler.
3.2.3
Circuit Design
Since there are four separate input groups on the DI module, it can be adapted to different process requirements when being connected. The circuit designs described below should be considered as solution examples.
Signaling-circuit voltage
For the voltage supply of the signaling contacts, you can use:
q q
an existing station or substation battery on the process side the PS power supply module mounted in the switchgear cabinet.
Fusing of the signaling circuit
We recommend fusing the signaling-circuit voltage applied to the DI module and to the signaling contacts on the process side using appliance miniature circuit breakers. Miniature circuit breakers with a rated current of 1 A for every four digital input modules have proved to be efficient in practical operation. Thanks to the isolated design of the input groups (including the inputs for the signaling-circuit voltage) and the electrical isolation on the digital input module, the latter allows all possibilities of grounding the station voltage:
q q q
Grounding of the signaling voltage
Ungrounded station voltage / signaling-circuit voltage Negative potential grounded Positive potential grounded.
81
3.2.4
Technical Data
The DI 6MD1021 digital input modules comply with the CE standard and can be used in the environment defined there. For further details on the environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3.
Table 3-1
Technical specifications of the DI modules DI 32 6MD1021-0AA00 DI 32 6MD1021-0BA00
Dimensions [W H D] Weight (without front connector)
25 mm 290 mm 210 mm Approx. 700 g Max. 500 mA Max. 75 mA Typ. 3 W Yes IP 20 0 C to 60 C
Power consumption
From backplane bus From signaling-circuit voltage US (all inputs active) Power loss of the module (50 % of the inputs active)
No-fan operation Degree of protection Ambient air temperature during uninterrupted duty Storage temperature Climate MTBF for uninterrupted duty at an average temperature of 40 C
-40 C to +70 C
IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation 100,000 hours
82
Table 3-1
Technical specifications of the DI modules (Forts.) DI 32 6MD1021-0AA00 DI 32 6MD1021-0BA00
Isolation test voltage between process inputs and electronics (acc. to IEC 60255-5) Rated voltage for determining the clearances and creepage distances (acc. to DIN VDE 0110) Surge voltage acc. to IEC 60255-5, test category III Electrical fast transient (burst) EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4 Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5 Conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6 Radiated RF-EM field EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated EM field from digital radio telephones ENV 50204 Appendix to IEC 61000-4-3 (under discussion Electrostatic discharge/ESD EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2
2.5 kVeff, 50 Hz, 1 min or 3.5 kV DC
250 V DC (overvoltage category/ pollution degree III/2) Max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms
Class 3: 2 kV with coupling clamp Class 3: 2 kV asymmetrical, 1 kV symmetrical Class 3: 10 Vrms
Class 3: 10 V/m
Class 3: 6 kV contact discharge / 8 kV air discharge Limit class A (industrial environment)
Emitted interference
Radio disturbances acc. to EN 55011 and IEC CISPR 11
83
Table 3-1

32 4 Yes 2.5 kVeff, 3.5 kV DC 250 V DC Single-point indications, fleeting indications, double-point indications, bit patterns, transformer taps; entire bytes can be combined 16 metered values Resolution 1 ms accuracy 2 ms, depending on synchronization cycle 32 green LEDs 2 red and 1 green LEDs Yes Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and software, memory check 24 to 60 V DC 19.2 to 72 V DC 48 kW 110 to 125 V DC 83 to 156 V DC 440 kW Yes Approx. 80 % to 125 % of US Approx. 90 % to 125 % of US
Digital inputs
Number of inputs Number of groups with common potential Electrical isolation between the groups Isolation test voltage between the groups Admissible potential difference between the groups Indication processing
Metered value processing Time stamping
Signal status indications Status / fault indications Interrupts Diagnostic functions
Input voltage
Rated input voltage Admissible range Input resistance Polarity reversal protection Rated value for 1 signal Rated value for 0 signal
-US to approx. 80 % of US
Max. 500 m (conductor capacity up to 50 nF) *
-US to approx. 90 %
of US Max. 1,000 m (conductor capacity up to 50 nF) *
Line length
Conductor cross-sections
1.5 mm2
84
Table 3-1
Filter times, acquisition times
Hardware input filters (parameterizable) Trigger delay, smoothing time (parameterizable) Counting frequency for metered values Pulse width Update of process input image Writing 1 event into event buffer Writing 32 events into event buffer
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ms
0 to 25.5 s, in increments of 100 ms
Max. 20 Hz
> 20 ms, depending on hardware filter time < 20 ms plus hardware filter time
plus CPU cycle time
< 40 ms plus hardware filter time < 400 ms plus hardware filter time
* Note that the configurable hardware filter time is limited by the line length
Table 3-2
Hardware filter time vs line length

Filter time minimal 1 ms minimal 4 ms minimal 8 ms minimal 16 ms
Line length up to 50 m up to 250 m up to 500 m up to 1000 m
85
3.3
AI Analogue Input
Analog input modules convert analog signals from the process to digital values for internal processing within the module and the SICAM eRTU substation controller. Voltage and current sensors, thermocouples, resistors and resistance thermometers figure among the sensors which can be connected. Characteristic features of analog input modules are:
q
Parameterizable measuring ranges, unipolar or bipolar, for current or voltage monitoring (see Chapter 3.3.6, Technical Data) Analog-to-digital conversion according to sigma/delta method (interference voltage suppression for 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 16 2/3 Hz) Cyclic state acquisition Cyclic conversion of all parameterized measured value channels and writing the measured values into the process input image (PII). This process image can be read directly by the CPU. Spontaneous event capturing The events recognized by threshold processing are tagged with a time stamp and are written chronologically into the event buffer (EPE) with a resolution of 1 ms. The AI module issues a hardware interrupt (HWI) which causes the CPU to collect the data (incl. time stamp). The event buffer can hold 100 events. Automatic self-calibration Signaling in case of failure or incorrigible deviations Encoding with 12 bits plus sign Precision 0.25 % or 0.15 % (referred to the end value).
q q q q
86
3.3 AI Analogue Input
Connection diagram AI-32

Abbreviations: MSVx Measured value source Ex Measured value input
Input
WL1 WL2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
PIN No. of the multipoint connector

Input monitoring (withdrawal loop) AI-32
Fig. 3-5
Terminal connection diagram of the AI-32 6MD1031 analog input module (solid-state)
MSV28 MSV29 MSV30 MSV31
- + = - + = - + = - + =
- + = - + = - + = - + =
- + = - + = - + = - + =
- + = - + = - + = - + =
- + = - + = - + = - + =
MSV8 I9N I10N I11N
- + = - + = - + = - + =
MSV4 MSV5 MSV6 I7N
- + = - + = - + = - + =
GND Common potential
I0N I1N MSV2 I3N
- =+ - =+ - + = - + =
E0 E1 E2 E3
GND GND
E4 I5 E6 E7 E8 I9 E10 E11
GND GND 19
E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19
Analog to-digital converter
GND 30 GND
E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27
Solid-state Multiplexer Potential isolation 2.5 kV
GND 41 GND
E28 E29 E30 E31
SUC004f
87
Connection diagram AI-16

Abbreviations: MSVx Measured value source Ex Measured value input -
Input
WL1 WL2 = = = = + + + + I0P I0N I1P MSV1 I2P I2N I3P MSV3

1 Input 2 monitoring 3 (withdrawal loop) 4 5 6 7 8 9 AI-16
I0N
-
GND Common potential
I1N
-
MSV2
-
I3N
MSV4
-
= = = =
+ + + +
MSV5
-
MSV6
-
I7N
MSV8
-
= = = =
+ + + +
I9N
-
I10N
-
I11N
MSV12
-
= = = =
+ + + +
MSV13
-
MSV14
-
MSV15
10 11 12 13 14 I4P 15 I4N 16 17 I5P I5N 18 I6P 19 I6N 20 21 I7P MSV7 22 23 24 25 I8P 26 I8N 27 I9P 28 MSV9 29 I10P 30 MSV10 31 32 I11P MSV11 33 34 35 36 I12P 37 I12N 38 I13P 39 I13N 40 I14P 41 I14N 42 43 I15P I15N 44 45 46 47 48
Analog to-digital converter
Relay Multiplexer
Potential isolation 2.5 kV
SUC005f
Fig. 3-6
Connection diagram AI-16 6MD1032 analog input module (relay)
88
AI modules are optionally available with:

q
Current inputs The current inputs are provided with highly accurate measuring shunts. Due to the low-resistance measuring circuit termination, they are less susceptible to interferences. Voltage inputs They are high-resistance and therefore susceptible to interferences.
The input type of the AI modules can be chosen independently of the magnitude to be measured, its conversion is handled by an interposed transducer.
3.3.1
Input Circuit of the AI-32 Module

The following figure shows the input circuit principle of the AI-32. It has 32 isolated analog inputs with a common potential.
Up Input E0 4
S-DUn ADC
PGA
...
Reference Voltage Up
GND 8 Terminals of the front Socket Shunt on current inputs filter CMOS Multiplexer Impedance converter
Un Analog Potential to-digital isolation converter 2.5 kV

SUC143
Fig. 3-7
Input circuit principle of the AI-32 module
89
3.3.2
Input Circuit of the AI-16 Module

The following figure shows the input circuit principle of the AI-16 module. It has 16 isolated analog inputs, each of which is connected to common potential via a 2-pole relay.
Input I0P
4 5
I0N
S-DADC PGA Reference Voltage GND Up Un
PIN No. of the multipoint connector ...
Terminals of the front Socket
Shunt on current inputs
filter
Relay Multiplexer
Impedance converter
Analog Potential to-digital isolation converter 2.5 kV

SUC144
Fig. 3-8
Input circuit principle of the AI-16 module
3.3.3
Overvoltage Protection
The inputs of the analog input modules are protected with suppressor diodes and RC networks against overvoltages and transients.
3.3.4
AI-32
Multiplexer
The AI-32 analog input module is equipped with a solid-state multiplexer. This concept allows a compact design, so that 32 analog inputs can be accommodated on one module. The AI-16 analog input module is optimized for higher electrical isolation and interference immunity between the input circuits. It is equipped with 16 2-pole relays. Each input circuit is switched through differentially to the A/D converter.
AI-16
90
3.3.5
A/D converter
The A/D converter function element is designed according to the principle of the sigma/delta method. Filter times, resolution and amplifier are parameterizable. The conversion time for a measured value (12 bits plus sign) is approx. 30 ms with a parameterized interference voltage suppression for 50 Hz.
Automatic calibration
The analog input modules calibrate themselves. For that purpose, the modules are provided with highly accurate, low-drift reference voltage sources. In order to reduce the temperature drift, the modules automatically perform a zero and a full-scale adjustment after being switched on and then at regular intervals. The A/D converter has a parameterizable pre-amplifier. It makes it possible to adapt different nominal input ranges to the ideal operating range of the converter, thus guaranteeing maximum conversion accuracy.
Parameterizable amplifier
3.3.6
Technical Data
The AI 6MD1031-0AA00 and AI 6MD1032-0AA00 analog input modules comply with the CE standard and can be used in the environment defined there. For further details on the environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3.
Table 3-3
Technical specifications of the AI modules AI-32 6MD1031-0AA00 AI-16 6MD1032-0AA00
25 mm 290 mm 210 mm Approx. 720 g Approx. 720 g Max. 700 mA Typ. 3.5 W 3.2 W additionally 1.6 W additionally Yes IP 20 0 C to 60 C
Power consumption
From backplane bus Power loss of the module (with unconnected inputs) Power loss of the measuring shunts at IE = 20 mA over all inputs
-40 C to +70 C
91
Table 3-3
Technical specifications of the AI modules (Forts.) AI-32 6MD1031-0AA00 AI-16 6MD1032-0AA00
Isolation test voltage between process inputs and electronics (acc. to IEC 60255-5) Rated voltage for determining the clearances and creepage distances (acc. to DIN VDE 0110) Surge voltage (acc. to IEC 60255-5, test category III) Electrical fast transient (burst) EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4 Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5 Conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6 Radiated RF-EM field EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated EM field from digital radio telephones ENV 50204 Appendix to IEC 61000-4-3 (under discussion) Electrostatic discharge/ESD EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2
250 V DC (overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2) Max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms Class 3: max. 2 kV with coupling clamp Class 3: max. 2 kV asymmetrical, max. 1 kV symmetrical Class 3: 10 Vrms
Class 3: 10 V/m
Class 3: 6 kV contact discharge / 8 kV air discharge Limit class A (industrial environment)
Emitted interference
Radio disturbances acc. to EN 55011and IEC CISPR 11
92
Table 3-3

16, separated via relay multiplexer
Analog inputs
Number of inputs Analog-to-digital conversion Resolution Automatic zero adjustment Automatic measuring range adjustment (full scale) Accuracy Measured value processing Cycle time (incl. int. calibration): for 32 measured values with: 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz for 16 measured values with: 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz for 4 measured values with: 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz for 1 measured value with: 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Time stamping Electrical isolation between the measuring circuits Isolation test voltage between the measuring circuits Admissible potential difference between the measuring circuits Interference voltage suppression: common mode 60 Hz differential mode 50 Hz Line length, shielded Conductor cross-sections
32 with common potential
Sigma/delta method 12 bits + sign Yes Internally via thermostable reference signal 0.25 % from 0 C to 60 C 0.15 % from 0 C to 60 C
Using thresholds acc. to VDEW recommendation
1645 ms 1005 ms 840 ms 845 ms 525 ms 440 ms 245 ms 165 ms 140 ms 95 ms 75 ms 65 ms
925 ms 605 ms 520 ms
265 ms 185 ms 160 ms 95 ms 75 ms 65 ms Resolution 1 ms, accuracy 2 ms, depending on synchronization cycle
No
Yes, relays 500 V DC 125 V DC
0V
90 dB 60 dB
100 dB 60 dB Max. 200 m
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
Status / fault indications Interrupts Diagnostic functions
2 red and 1 green LEDs Yes Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and software, memory check
93
Table 3-3
Current inputs
Input areas (define possible measuring ranges for the AI module as a whole) Measuring ranges parameterizable for each input input area 1 mA input area 20 mA
1 mA 20 mA 24 mA
0 to + 0.5 mA 0 to + 1.0 mA 0 to + 2.5 mA 0 to + 5.0 mA 0 to + 10.0 mA 0 to + 20.0 mA 0 to + 1.5 mA 0 to + 3.0 mA 0 to + 6.0 mA 0 to + 12.0 mA 0 to + 24.0 mA
0.5 to + 0.5 mA* 1.0 to + 1.0 mA* 2.5 to + 2.5 mA* 5.0 to + 5.0 mA* 10.0 to + 10.0 mA* 20.0 to + 20.0 mA* 1.5 to + 1.5 mA* 3.0 to + 3.0 mA* 6.0 to + 6.0 mA* 12.0 to + 12.0 mA* 24.0 to + 24.0 mA* > 250 W 7.2 V DC 10 V DC 1V 6V 10 V
input area 24 mA
Input resistance Input voltage Admissible peak voltage (t < 1 s) Voltage inputs Input areas (define possible measuring ranges for the AI module as a whole) Measuring ranges parameterizable for each input: input area 1 V input area 6 V
0 to + 0.5 V 0 to + 1.0 V 0 to + 1.5 V 0 to + 3.0 V 0 to + 6.0 V 0 to + 1.25 V 0 to + 2.5 V 0 to + 5.0 V 0 to + 10.0 V
0.5 to + 0.5 V* 1.0 to + 1.0 V* 1.5 to + 1.5 V* 3.0 to + 3.0 V* 6.0 to + 6.0 V* 1.25 to + 1.25 V* 2.5 to + 2.5 V* 5.0 to + 5.0 V* 10.0 to + 10.0 V* > 1 MW Max. 12 V DC Max. 20 V DC
input area 10 V
Input resistance Input voltage Admissible peak voltage (t < 1 s) * With a resolution of 11 bits plus sign.
94
3.4 CO Command Output Module
3.4
CO Command Output Module

Digital output modules convert the internal signal levels of the SICAM eRTU substation controller to the external signal levels needed for the process. These modules are suitable for controlling contactors, small-power motors, motor starters and lamps, among other things. Characteristic features of command output modules CO are: q q q 32 binary outputs (realized as 16 2-pole relay outputs) One common potential for each contact of the 16 2-pole relays Time-controlled output of:
q q
single commands double commands Without external release and switching current check: 32 1-pole outputs 32 1-pole outputs 16 2-pole outputs. With external release and switching current check (required by the function module CR, see Chapter 3.5): 32 1-pole outputs (corresponds to 1-pole operation without CR) 32 1-pole outputs 16 2-pole outputs (mode is possible, but not standard). Digital output via PIO process output image with high isolation voltage Bit pattern output, non-retentive in case of a voltage failure One-out-of-n monitoring of the outputs Continuous readback of the output relay drivers
Safe command output, by selecting between different operating modes:

q
time-independent digital output

q q
Internal output safety

q q
95
CO terminal connection diagram

Abbreviations: UIx Command voltage input
Input
WL1 Load resistors WL2 (e.g. interposing relay) CMD0 CMD1 CMD2 CMD3 CMD4 CMD5 CMD6 CMD7 O0.0 O0.1 O1.0 O1.1 O2.0 O2.1 O3.0 O3.1

1 Input 2 monitoring 3 (withdrawal loop) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Selection/ Switching thr. Up Un
CO
RLCx Release contact CMDx Command destination Ox Command output
CMD8 CMD9 CMD10 CMD11 CMD12 CMD13 CMD14 CMD15
O4.0 O4.1 O5.0 O5.1 O6.0 O6.1 O7.0 O7.1
Electrical isolation 2.5 kV
CMD16 CMD17 CMD18 CMD19 CMD20 CMD21 CMD22 CMD23
O8.0 O8.1 O9.0 O9.1 O10.0 O10.1 O11.0 O11.1 RLC0 RLC1 O12.0 O12.1 O13.0 O13.1 O14.0 O14.1 O15.0 O15.1
Si
Release
CMD24 CMD25 CMD26 CMD27 CMD28 CMD29 CMD30 CMD31 Station/ substation battery LL+
+ -
UI0 UI1
Grounding (optional)
SUC006f
Fig. 3-9
Terminal connection diagram of the CO 6MD1022 command output module
96
Relay control
3.4.1
Command Output on the CO Module

The following figure shows the command output circuit principle of the CO module. It has 32 isolated output contacts. They are arranged in two groups of 16, each of which has its own command output circuit. The 2-pole outputs (16 single commands) are switched through via K20, the 1-pole and 1 1/2-pole outputs (32 single commands) via K19. In addition, the K22 release relay can be looped into the output circuit (for details, see circuit examples in Chapter3.5.2). The K17 and K18 selection relays ensure that the desired output Ox.0 or Ox.1 of the 2-pole output is activated in case of 1-pole and 1 1/2-pole outputs.
Connection Terminals 34 RLC0
35
K22
CO internal release
RLC1
45
UI0
46
UI1
K20
K19
Switching throug of the output voltage
K18
K17 4
Selection relay
O0.0
5
K1
O0.1
. . .
43 44
. . .
. . .
K16
Output relays
O15.0 O15.1
SUC142f
Fig. 3-10 Principle of the command output circuit of the CO module
97
3.4.2
Circuit Design
The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the "unprotected digital output" operating mode. This operating mode is characterized by the following features:
q q q q
Unprotected digital output
Several output relays can be controlled independently of each other at the same time. 2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relays in the process (depending on wiring) The connection points of the UI0 and UI1 output voltages are permanently switched through to the contacts of the output relays. The release contact on the CO module is not used.
Process
+
+
Cabinet or enclosure
O0.0 4 5
Output relay
CO
O0.1
+ -
O15.0 Si O15.1 UI0 E.g. to other rack Grounding (optional) To other Modules (on the same fuse circuit) UI1 RLC0 RLC1
43 44 45 46 34 35
Selection Switching through release Potential isolation 2.5 kV
Station/ substation battery
L+ + -
P-
SUC031
Fig. 3-11 Wiring in the digital output mode unprotected (2-pole connection of the load disconnecting relays)
98
1-pole command output
The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the "1-pole command output" operating mode. This operating mode is characterized by the following features:
q q q
Only 1 command at a time is output. 1-pole activation of the load disconnecting relay in the process. The release contact on the CO module is not used.
Process
+ +
O0.0 O0.1 4 5
Output relay
CO
O15.0 O15.1
43 44 45 46 34 35
L+ + +
P-
UI0 To other Modules UI1 E.g. to (on the same other rack fuse circuit) RLC0 Wiring necessary if no suppressor diodes at load disconnecting relay RLC1 Grounding (optional)
Si
Selection Switching through release
SUC029
Fig. 3-12 Wiring in the "1-pole command output" operating mode
If the load disconnecting relays are activated without suppressor diodes in this operating mode of the CO module, the internal suppressor diodes of the CO module must be wired (via the RLC1 connection point). The grounding of the command output voltage can be adapted to the process requirements without any restrictions, since the outputs of the CO modules are isolated.
99
1 1/2-pole command output
The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2-pole A"). This operating mode is characterized by the following features:
q q
Only 1 command at a time is output. 1 1/2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relay in the process, i.e. one coil side is applied to the command output voltage via the output relay, while the other coil side is applied to the command output voltage via the release contact on the CO module using the common return line of all load disconnecting relays. When not activated, the load disconnecting relay is de-energized by the release contact.
Process
+ +
O0.0 O0.1 4 5
Output relay
CO
O15.0 O15.1
43 44 45 46 34 35
Si Station/ substation battery L+ + +
UI0 To other Modules (on the same fuse circuit) UI1 RLC0 RLC1
P-
E.g. to other rack Grounding (optional)
SUC030
Fig. 3-13 Wiring in the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode
The grounding of the command output voltage can be adapted to the process requirements without any restrictions, since the outputs of the CO modules are isolated.
100
2-pole command output
The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the "2-pole command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2-pole B"). This operating mode is characterized by the following features:
q q
Only 1 command at a time is output. 2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relay in the process, i.e. both coil sides are applied to the command output voltage via the output relay and the switching-through element connected in series. When not activated, the load disconnecting relay is de-energized. The release contact is not used.
q q
Process
+
O0.0 4 5
Output relay
CO
O0.1
O15.0 Si O15.1 UI0 E.g. to other rack Grounding (optional) To other Modules (on the same fuse circuit) UI1 RLC0 RLC1
43 44 45 46 34 35
+ Station/ substation battery
L+ + -
P-
SUC031
Fig. 3-14 Wiring in the "2-pole command output" operating mode
The grounding of the command output voltage can be adapted to the process requirements without any restrictions, since the outputs of the CO modules are isolated.
101
3.4.3
Technical Data
The CO digital output module complies with the CE standard and can be used in the environment defined there. For further details on the environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3.
Table 3-4
Technical specifications of the CO module CO 32 6MD1022-0AA00
Dimensions and weight Power consumption
Dimensions [W H D] Weight (without front connector) From backplane bus without output
25 mm
290 mm 210 mm
Approx. 800 g Max. 300 mA
From backplane bus Max. 600 mA during command output (1 out of n) From backplane bus for each additional relay output Power loss of the module without output Power loss of the module during command output Environmental conditions No-fan operation Degree of protection Ambient air temperature during uninterrupted duty Storage temperature Climate Max. 75 mA Typ. 1.5 W Typ. 3 W Yes IP 20 0 C to 60 C
- 40 C to + 70 C
IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation
MTBF for uninterrupted duty 100,000 hours at an average temperature of 40 C
102
Table 3-4
Technical specifications of the CO module (Forts.) CO 32 6MD1022-0AA00
Isolation test voltage between process outputs and electronics (acc. to IEC 60255-5)
Rated voltage for determining the 250 V DC clearances and creepage distances (overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2) (acc. to DIN VDE 0110) Surge voltage (acc. to IEC 60255-5, test category III) Electrical fast transient (burst) EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4 Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5 Conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6 Radiated RF-EM field EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated EM field from digital radio telephones ENV 50204 Appendix to IEC 61000-4-3 (under discussion) Electrostatic discharge/ESD EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2 Emitted interference Digital outputs Radio disturbances acc. to EN 55011 and IEC CISPR 11 Number of relay outputs Separate switching through of the output voltage Separate release contact Switching voltage of the relay contacts Operating modes Command output (bitstring) Command output Indications, interrupts, Signal status indications diagnostics Status / fault indications Interrupts Diagnostic functions Max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms Class 3: max. 2 kV with coupling clamp Class 3: max. 2 kV asymmetrical, max. 1 kV symmetrical Class 3: 10 Vrms
Class 3: 10 V/m
Class 3: 6 kV contact discharge / 8 kV air discharge Limit class A (industrial environment) 32 1-pole or 16 2-pole with common potential, normally open contacts 1-pole or 2-pole (determined by the operating mode) 1-pole 125 V DC 25 % Persistent output Pulse output output time 0 to 60 s, in increments of 10 ms 32 green LEDs (with 2-pole output, 2 LEDs per output circuit light up) 2 red and 1 green LEDs Yes Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and software, memory check, 1-out-of-n monitoring
103
Table 3-4
Technical specifications of the CO module (Forts.) CO 32 6MD1022-0AA00
Max. switching current and switching capacity (total current of all output circuits)
DC control of purely resistive loads or fully suppressed process relay (with external suppressor diode) Command output voltage AC [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) DC control of purely inductive loads or unsuppressed process relay (LS/RS < 7 ms, internal suppressor diodes of CO module not connected) Command output voltage AC [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) AC control of purely resistive loads (cos f = 1) Command output voltage ACn [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) AC control of purely inductive loads (cos f = 0.4) Command output voltage AC [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) Line length, shielded Conductor cross-sections
24 5 360 100 0.5106
48 5 230 65 1106
60 5 200 55 1106
110 5 133 50 1106
125 5 133 50 1106
24 5 360 60 0.3106
48 5 230 30 0.5106
60 5 200 27.5 0.5106
110 5 133 25 0.5106
125 5 133 25 0.5106
24 5 120 120 2106
48 5 240 240 1106
60 5 300 300 1106
110 5 550 550 0.5106
125 5 625 625 0.5106
24 3 75 40 1106
48 3 150 80 0.5106
60 3 180 100 0.5106
110 3 330 180 0.2106
125 3 370 200 0.2106
Max. 200 m 1.5 mm2
104
3.5 CR Command Release Module
3.5
CR Command Release Module

The CR command release module switches the output voltage in 2-pole mode to the command output circuit, depending on the result of several checks. The functions on the CR module allow to distribute the command output circuit to two separate modules, thus meeting very high demands as to the safety of the command output. In addition, eight binary inputs and eight relay outputs for acquisition and control of process data are provided on each module. Characteristic features of command release modules CR are: q q q q Release control Control of an external release relay to enhance the switching capacity Electrical isolation check of the command output circuit Impedance check of the command output circuit (switching current check):
q q q
Measuring the actual value and comparing it to the scheduled value High accuracy ( 2 %) Tolerance band of the command output circuit +30 % / -20 %
q q q q q
Monitoring of the command output voltage Monitoring of the command execution (reading back the output relays) Monitoring of the command output time Functional postprocessing of the process output, e.g. control and monitoring of the command output 8 inputs for process and system tasks:
q q q
Spontaneous indication acquisition (single-point and fleeting indication) with 1 ms real-time resolution Parameterizable input filters (hardware and software filters) Event buffer for 50 events Isolated from command output and command release circuit Command output via PIO process output image (time-independent) or time-controlled command output via APA job buffer
8 outputs for process and system tasks:

q q
105
Standard diagnostic facilities:

q q q
LED indicators for the process image and the module status on the front panel of the module Local diagnostics with the programming device Operational and status IDs (qualifiers) in the telegram
106
CR terminal connection diagram

Abbreviations: RUCx Release contact CMDx Command destination INDx US Indication source Signaling-circuit voltage IND0 IND1 IND2 IND3 IND4 IND5 IND6 IND7
-
Input
WL1 WL2 I0.0 I0.1 I0.2 I0.3 I0.4 I0.5 I0.6 I0.7 US UCP O0.0 O0.1 O0.2 O1.0 O1.1 O1.2 O2.0 O2.1 O3.0 O3.1 O4.0 O4.1 O4.2 O5.0 O5.1 O5.2 O6.0 O6.1 O7.0 O7.1 UBP UBN RUCP RUCN

1 Input 2 monitoring (withdrawal loop) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
release
CR
SCCx Switching current check Ox.x Ix UCP Command output Signal input Commong potential of the signal inputs
= =
CMD1
CMD2 CMD3
Electrical isolation 2.5 kV
CMD0
CMD4
CMD5
CMD6 CMD7 L+ Si PStation or substation battery Command output voltage
check Potential lation check Switching SCCN
SCCP1 SCCN1 Wiring of the SCCP Switching current check SCCN
Up
Un
Release control
Relay control
filter
SUC007f
Fig. 3-15 Terminal connection diagram of the CR 6MD1023 command release module
107
3.5.1
Command Release on the CR Module

Depending on the result of several checking criteria, the CR module switches the output voltage in 2-pole mode to the command output circuit via powerful contacts. This circuit design offers several advantages:
q
The entire command output circuit including the CO digital output module down to the command interposing relay is de-energized in idle state. Prior to command release, the entire command output circuit can be checked (in de-energized state) for electrical isolation and short circuits, interruption and connections in parallel (switching current check). The command output circuit is distributed to two independent modules. This increases the command output considerably.
Monitoring of the output voltage
The CR function module monitors the command output voltage prior to command release. In case of an inadmissible deviation (< 17 V), the command output voltage is not switched through and the command release is aborted. The electrical isolation check detects electrical connections of the command output circuit to interference voltages. The following wiring faults and errors are detected:
q q
Check for electrical isolation
Electrical connection between the command output circuit and the output voltage An isolated direct voltage (> 2 V) in the command output circuit.
If the command output circuit is looped over a CO module, the abovementioned electrical connections are detected between the CO and the CR module, on the CO module or between the CO module and the connected load disconnecting relay. In case of an inadmissible connection of the output circuit, the command output voltage is not switched through and the command release is aborted.
108
Switching current check
For the switching current check, the impedance of the command output circuit is measured and compared to the parameterized value. The following wiring faults and errors are detected:
q q q
Short circuit between P and N release contacts Interruption in the command output circuit Connection of another load resistor or connection in parallel or in series of additional resistors.
In case of an inadmissible impedance (tolerance +30 % / -20 %) of the output circuit, the command output voltage is not switched through and the command release is aborted. Relay outputs The 8 relay outputs on the CR module are general-purpose digital outputs. They are not blocked by additional hardware functions. Of the 8 relay outputs, 4 are changeover contacts and 4 are normally open contacts. Possible applications include the control of:
q q
cabinet light alarm signaling systems.
Digital inputs
8 digital inputs for general process inputs are provided on the CR module. Their design corresponds to that of the inputs on the DI digital input module (see Chapter 3.2). Each of the inputs I0 to I7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The applied input voltage is compared to a reference voltage. This reference value is directly proportional to the applied signaling-circuit voltage (US). If the input voltage present at inputs I0 to I7) exceeds approx. 80 % of the signaling voltage, binary state "1" is recognized. Possible applications include:
q q q q q
door contact monitoring general interrogation check of the signal status and fault indications on the function modules (LED tests) fuse fault transmission link errors (signal level errors).
109
3.5.2
Circuit Design
The following figure shows the wiring of the CR (and the CO) module in the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2pole A"). This operating mode facilitates: 1 1/2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relays in the process, i.e. one coil side is applied to the command output voltage via the output relays of the CO module, while the other coil side is applied to the command output voltage via the release contacts on the CR module. Prior to switching through the command output voltage, several checks are performed (parameterizable):
q q q
1-pole command output (positive potential connected) q
monitoring of the command output voltage electrical isolation check of the command output circuit impedance check of the command output circuit (switching current check).
q q
When not activated, the load disconnecting relays are de-energized. By distributing the command output circuit to two independent modules, the safety of the command output is increased compared to direct output via the CO module.
Process
+ +
O0.0 O0.1 4 5
Output relay
CO
O15.0 O15.1 UI0 UI1 To other CO Modules RLC0 RLC1
43 44 45 46 34 35
Wiring necessary if no suppressor diodes at load disconnecting relay
RUCP RUCN
40 41 +
CR
Release control
- +
L+ Si P-
UBP UBN SCCP1 SCCN1 SCCP SCCN
37 38 43 44 45 46 + Switching SCCN Electrical Potential check
SUC032
Fig. 3-16 Wiring of the CR module in the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode (positive potential connected)
110
If the load disconnecting relays are activated without suppressor diodes in this operating mode of the CO module, the internal suppressor diodes of the CO module must be wired (via the RLC1 connection point). The grounding of the command output voltage can be adapted to the process requirements without any restrictions, since the outputs of the CR and CO modules are isolated. 1-pole command output (negative potential connected) As opposed to the 1 1/2-pole command output variant illustrated in Figure 3-16 , the negative potential is connected in the following figure (the only difference lies in the wiring of the P and N release contacts).
Note: Please make sure that a correctly poled command output voltage is applied at the CR module.
Process
+ + -
O0.0 O0.1 4 5
Output relay
CO
+ + -
O15.0 O15.1 UI0 To other CO Modules UI1 RLC0 RLC1
43 44
Selection
45 46
Switching through release
34 35
Wiring necessary if no suppressor diodes at load disconnecting relay RUCP RUCN - + L+ PStation/ substation battery Si UBP UBN SCCP1 SCCN1 SCCP SCCN 40 41 37 38 43 44 45 46 + -
CR
Release control
Electrical Potential check Switching SCCN
SUC139
Fig. 3-17 Wiring of the CR module in the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode (negative potential connected)
111
2-pole command output q q
The following figure shows the wiring of the CR (and the CO) module in the "2-pole command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2-pole B"). This operating mode facilitates: 2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relays in the process; when not activated, the load disconnecting relays are de-energized. Prior to switching through the command output voltage, several checks are performed (parameterizable):
q q q
monitoring of the command output voltage electrical isolation check of the command output circuit impedance check of the command output circuit (switching current check).
By distributing the command output circuit to two independent modules, the safety of the command output is increased compared to direct output via the CO module.
Process
+
O0.0 O0.1 4 5
Output relay
+ -
CO
O15.0 O15.1 UI0 UI1 To other CO Modules RLC0 RLC1
43 44
Selection
45 46
Switching through release
34 35
RUCP RUCN
40 41 +
CR
Release control
- + L+ PStation/ substation battery
Si
UBP UBN SCCP1 SCCN1 SCCP SCCN
SUC033
Fig. 3-18 Wiring of the CR module in the "2-pole command output" operating mode
The grounding of the command output voltage can be adapted to the process requirements without any restrictions, since the outputs of the CR and CO modules are isolated.
112
Connection of an external release relay
The following figure shows the wiring of the CR module for command output with an external release relay. This circuit variant is characterized by the following features:
q q
The electrical isolation check and the switching current check are also available in the external command output circuit. When not activated, both the external release relay and the load disconnecting relays are de-energized.
Process
+ +
O0.0 O0.1 4 5
Output relay
CO
O15.0 O15.1 To other CO Modules UI0 UI1 RLC0 RLC1
43 44
Selection
45 46 34 35
Switching through Release Potential isolation 2.5 kV
Alternative suppressor diode
External release relay + -
RUCP RUCN
40 41
CR
Release control
UBP UBN Si Station/ - + substation PL+ battery SCCP1 SCCN1 SCCP SCCN
SUC138
Fig. 3-19 Wiring of the CR module in the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode with external release relay
The switching capacity is increased to 5 A breaking current at 110 V DC.
113
3.5.3
Technical Data
The command release modules comply with the CE standard and can be used in the environment defined there. For further details on the environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3.
Table 3-5
Technical specifications of the CR modules CR 6MD1023-0AA00 CR 6MD1023-0BA00
25 mm
290 mm 210 mm
Approx. 800 g
Power consumption
From backplane bus without command output during command output
Max. 400 mA Max. 800 mA

Max. 15 mA
From signaling-circuit voltage US (all channels active) Power loss of the module

without command output during command output
Typ. 2 W Typ. 4 W
Yes IP 20 0 C to 60 C
-40 C to +70 C
114
Table 3-5
Technical specifications of the CR modules (Forts.) CR 6MD1023-0AA00 CR 6MD1023-0BA00
Isolation test voltage between process inputs and electronics (acc. to IEC 60255-5) Rated voltage for determining the clearances and creepage distances (acc. to DIN VDE 0110) Surge voltage (acc. to IEC 60255-5, test category III) Electrical fast transient (burst) EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4 Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5 Conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6 Radiated RF-EM field EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated EM field from digital radio telephones ENV 50204 Appendix to IEC 61000-4-3 (under discussion) Electrostatic discharge/ESD EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2
250 V DC (overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2)
Max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms Class 3: max. 2 kV with coupling clamp Class 3: max. 2 kV asymmetrical, max. 1 kV symmetrical Class 3: 10 Vrms
Class 3: 10 V/m
Class 3: 6 kV contact discharge / 8 kV air discharge Limit class A (industrial environment) 2 separate relays, changeover contacts 8 isolated contacts (4 CO contacts and 4 NO contacts) 8 24 to 60 V DC 110 to 125 V DC
Emitted interference Inputs/outputs
Radio disturbances acc. to EN 55011 and IEC CISPR 11 Number of release contacts Number of command outputs Number of digital inputs Rated input voltage
115
Table 3-5
Digital outputs
Switching voltage of the relay contacts DC control of purely resistive loads or fully suppressed process relay (with external suppressor diode) Max. switching current and switching capacity (total current of all output circuits): Command output voltage AC [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) DC control of purely inductive loads or unsuppressed process relay (LS/RS < 7 ms, internal suppressor diodes of CO module not connected ) Max. switching current and switching capacity (total current of all output circuits): Command output voltage AC [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) AC control of purely resistive loads (cos f = 1) Max. switching current and switching capacity (total current of all output circuits): Command output voltage AC [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) AC control of purely inductive loads (cos f = 0.4) Max. switching current and switching capacity (total current of all output circuits): Command output voltage AC [V] Continuous current AC [A] Making capacity [W] Breaking capacity [W] Service life (switching cycles with 50% of Irated) Digital output (bitstring output) Command output
Max. 125 V DC 25 %
24 5 360 100 0.5106
48 5 230 65 1106
60 5 200 55 1106
110 5 133 50 1106
125 5 133 50 1106
24 5 360 60 0.3106
48 5 230 30 0.5106
60 5 200 27.5 0.5106
110 5 133 25 0.5106
125 5 133 25 0.5106
24 5 120 120 2106
48 5 240 240 1106
60 5 300 300 1106
110 5 550 550 0.5106
125 5 625 625 0.5106
24 3 75 40 1106
48 3 150 80 0.5106
60 3 180 100 0.5106
110 3 330 180 0.2106
125 3 370 200 0.2106
Persistent output Pulse output output time 0 to 60 s, in increments of 10 ms
116
Table 3-5
Command release
Command release type Command release time Switching current check Measuring-circuit voltage Measuring range of the output circuit Tolerance limits
Pulse output Output time 0 to 60 s, in increments of 10 ms
5 V 5 %, limited by hardware circuit 30 W to 50 kW, accuracy 2 W or 2 % Nominal value + 30 % / - 20 %

24 to 60 V DC - 20 % to + 25 % Approx. 80 % to + 125 % of US - US to approx. 80 % of US 110 to 125 V DC 25 % Approx. 90 % to + 125 % of US - US to approx. 90 % of US
Digital inputs
Rated input voltage Admissible tolerances Rated value for 1 signal Rated value for 0 signal Input filters (parameterizable) Input resistance Line length Conductor cross-sections Indication processing Time stamping
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ms 48 kW 500 m (conductor capacity up to 50 nF) 1.5 mm2 Single-point and fleeting indications Resolution 1 ms, accuracy 2 ms, depending on synchronization cycle 440 kW 1,000 m (conductor capacity up to 50 nF)
Signal status indications command release digital outputs digital inputs Status / fault indications Interrupts Diagnostic functions
1 green LED 8 green LEDs 8 green LEDs

2 red and 1 green LEDs Yes Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and software, memory check
117
3.6
Status and Diagnostic Indications

On the SICAM I/O modules DI, AI, CO and CR there are two red and one green LEDs for the indication of the operational status and of internal and external faults. The meaning of the LEDs is identical for all SICAM I/O modules of the SICAM eRTU system and listed in the following table.
LED
INTF EXTF RUN INTF EXTF RUN INTF EXTF RUN
Status
flashing off on
Meaning
Restarting. Parameters are transmitted from the CPU, e.g. after switching on the supply voltage.
off off on
Normal operational status: module is up to date and ready for operation
on off on
Internal fault: Wrong parameters
Memory error Command output error (only CO, CR)
INTF EXTF RUN
off on on
External fault: Front connector missing
No signalling-circuit voltage (only DI) External fault inputs for metered values or transformer taps (only DI) Wire break (only AI, in the 4 to 20 mA measuring range) Measured value in overflow range (only AI)
INTF EXTF RUN
irrelevant irrelevant pulsing
Internal data exchange between CPU and I/O module: The RUN LED goes out when data are ready for collection by the CPU and lights up again when the data have been collected.
INTF EXTF RUN INTF EXTF RUN
off off off
Internal data exchange interrupted No supply voltage
on off off
Module resetting Module does not start up
118
Time Signal Receiver

This chapter describes the SICAM eRTU time signal receivers.
Contents
4.1 4.2 4.3
DCF77 Receiver GPS Receiver IRIG-B Signal
120 122 124
119
4 Time Signal Receiver
4.1
4.1.1
DCF77 Receiver
General
DCF77 time signals are broadcasted in the long-wave range from the radio transmitter station Mainflingen near Frankfurt on the Main. The transmitted signal covers a radius of 2,000 km, although unfavouable geographic conditions may prevent reception even within a smaller radius. The DCF77 receiver compares the values it receives to an internally simulated signal and stores the control variables in a fail-safe way, thus providing the following functions:
q q
DCF77 time signal
Features
Bridging a bad or interfered reception for up to 2 hours Negligible receive jitter from second to second.
Design
The DCF77 receiver is designed for mounting on DIN rails. The housing is made of plastic, the antenna of aluminium. For the synchronization of the MCP communications processor, a control voltage of 5 V is used.
q
Control voltage
Accuracy
The system accuracy depends on the individual modules and amounts to 2 ms.
120
4.1 DCF77 Receiver
4.1.2
Technical Data
Table 4-1
Technical specifications of the DCF77 time signal receiver, model Hopf 4465 DCF77
Dimensions
Receiver (W D H) Indoor antenna (W D H) Outdoor antenna (W D H)
65 mm 130 mm 105 mm 310 mm 130 mm 45 mm 900 mm 430 mm 40 mm Galvanized sheet steel Anodized aluminium 24 V / 48 V DC* 2.5 W see Chapter 1.3.3
Enclosure
Indoor antenna Outdoor antenna
Power supply
Input voltage Power consumption
Environmental conditions Input Socket for input signal Input sensitivity Control range Accuracy Indications, interrupts, diagnostics Antenna cable Time offset Status indications Max. cable length
BNC 40 mV 70 dB 2 ms 3 LEDs 500 m
* For supply voltages > 48 V, you need an AC/DC or DC/DC converter.
121
4.2
4.2.1
GPS Receiver
General
GPS (Global Positioning System) is a satellite-aided U.S. navigation system. The system is based upon 24 satellites, which revolve around the earth on different orbits at an altitude of 20,000 km broadcasting the time of their own on-board clocks. This time signal can be used all over the world.
q q q
GPS time signal
Features
Isolated antenna circuit Parameterizable via serial interface All outputs isolated
Accuracy
q
Design
The GPS receiver is designed as snap-in module.
Note: The GPS receiver Hopf Modell 6870 simulates a DCF77 receiver and must therefore be connected as such to the SICAM eRTU, as well as configured in SICAM plusTOOLS. Refer to the respective instructions for the configuration of the receiver. You can also connect to the SICAM eRTU a GPS receiver without DCF77 simulation (e. g. Truetime). The receiver then occupies a serial port (X1 of the MCPs) and one MCP channel.
122
4.2 GPS Receiver
4.2.2
Table 4-2
Technical Data
Technical specifications of the GPS time signal receiver, model Hopf 6870 GPS
Dimensions Enclosure
Receiver (W D H) Material Weight
160 mm x 80 mm x 55 mm Weather-proof and splash-proof, made of macrolon acc. to IP 65/DIN 40050 0.4 kg 2 x 0.5 mm2 24 to 48 V DC* 9 to 24 V AC 220 V AC 2.5 W see Chapter 1.3.3
Serial Port Power supply
Shielded 2-conductor cable Input voltage
Power consumption Environmental conditions Input Socket for input signal Input sensitivity Receive frequency Accuracy Back-up Indications, interrupts, diagnostics Antenna cable Accuracy Maintenance-free back-up through stand-by clock Status indications Max. cable length
BNC -143 dB 1.575.42 MHz 2 ms 3 days 3 LEDs 15 m with special cable 70 m; with repeater 150 m
* For supply voltages > 48 V, you need an AC/DC or DC/DC converter.
123
4.3
4.3.1
IRIG-B Signal
General
IRIG-B is a normalized time signal on the basis of the satellite-aided navigation system GPS. This time signal can be used all over the world.
q q
IRIG-B time signal
Features
The IRIG-B time signal contains no year. The IRIG-B receiver from TrueTime needs at least four satellite time signals.
Accuracy
q
Design
The IRIG-B receiver is suitable for installation in a 19" rack.
Note: The IRIG-B receiver XL-AK from TrueTime must be connected to the SICAM eRTU and parameterized in SICAM plusTOOLS. For details on configuring the receiver, please refer to the pertinent documentation from TrueTime.
124
4.3 IRIG-B Signal
4.3.2
Technical Data
Table 4-3
Technical data of the IRIG-B time signal receiver, TrueTime model XL-AK. IRIG-B
Dimensions Enclosure
Receiver (W D H) Material Weight
445 mm x 4318 mm x 2667 mm Weather-proof and splash-proof, made of macrolon acc. to IP 65/DIN 40050 3.175 kg 9.6 kBit/s and 19.2 kBit/s 120 to 370 V DC 95 to 260 V AC <15 W see Chapter 1.3.3
Serial Port Power supply
RS232 or RS485 Input voltage Power consumption
Environmental conditions Input Socket for input signal Input sensitivity Receive frequency Accuracy Back-up Indications, interrupts, diagnostics Antenna cable * SA = Selective availability Accuracy Battery lithium, 3.5 V Status indications Cable length
BNC high:TTL to 10 V DC low: TTL 1,575.42 MHz (L1 signal) 10 us for UTC or 100 ns without SA*) 10 years service life 1 LED Standard 15 m possible up to 450 m
125
126
System Functions
This chapter gives information about system procedures and how they are processed.
Contents
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
Interplay between the CPU and MCP Change in Operating State of the CPU Organization Blocks Diagnostic Buffer Status Indications General Interrogation Clock Synchronization
128 131 133 134 135 139 140
127
5 System Functions
5.1
Interplay between the CPU and MCP

Communication of the SICAM eRTU with control centres, bay devices and substations is handled by the MCP communications processor . Communication with the I/O modules, SICAM Diamond and the automation which has been configured with SICAM CFC, is handled by the CPU.
MCP
Tasks of the MCP in themonitoring device:

q
Passing indications, measured values and metered values from the CPU to the control centres. These items of information can come from the I/O modules or have been created in the CFC. Passing indications, measured values and metered values from bay devices/substations to the CPU for transmission to SICAM Diamond. Passing indications, measured values and metered values from bay devices/substations to the CPU for transmission to SICAM CFC. Passing indications, measured values and metered values from bay devices/substations to the control centre.
q q
Tasks of the MCP in thecontrol direction:

q q q q
Reception of commands from the control centres and transmission to the CPU for passing them to the command output modules Reception of commands from the control centres and transmission to bay devices/substations Reception of results from the SICAM CFC links (via the CPU) and transmission to bay devices/substations Reception of the commands from the SICAM Diamond (via the CPU) and transmission to bay devices/substations
General tasks:
q q q
Monitoring of the startup of the bay devices and substations Connection via telecontrol, bay devices and substation communication protocols Managing the time signal for time synchronization
If command feedback is configured, this feedback is sent through the system in opposite direction.
128
5.1 Interplay between the CPU and MCP
CPU
Tasks of the CPU in themonitoring device:

q q q
Reception of indications, measured values and metered values of the I/O modules and transmission to SICAM Diamond Reception of indications, measured values and metered values of the I/O modules and transmission to SICAM CFC Reception of indications, measured values and metered values of the I/O modules and transmission to MCP for passing to the control centres Transmission of results from the SICAM CFC links to the MCP for passing to the control centres Transmission of results from the SICAM CFC links to the SICAM Diamond Reception of indications, measured values and metered values of the bay devices/substations (via the MCP) and transmission to SICAM Diamond Reception of indications, measured values and metered values of the bay devices/substations (via the MCP) and transmission to SICAM CFC Transmission of status indications to SICAM Diamond
q q q
Tasks of the CPU in thecontrol direction:

q q q q q q
Transmission of the commands received from MCP (control centre) to the command output modules Transmission of the commands received from SICAM Diamond to the MCP for output to bay devices/substations Transmission of the commands received from SICAM Diamond to the command output modules Transmission of the commands received from SICAM Diamond to SICAM CFC Transmission of the commands received from SICAM CFC to the command output modules Transmission of the commands received from SICAM CFC to the MCP for output to bay devices/substations
If command feedback is configured, this feedback is sent through the system in opposite direction.
129
5 System Functions
General tasks
q q q
Execution of user functions which were configured with SICAM CFC such as signal links, command interlocking, control procedures, etc.) Execution of the user programs created with SCL / AWL Procedure of the operating system The operating system control the SICAM eRTU, coordinates the cyclic interrupts and hardware interrupts and monitors the user program cycle and controls the K and P buses.
130
5.2 Change in Operating State of the CPU
5.2
Change in Operating State of the CPU
Processes in the CPU can cause a change in operating state. Example: When the supply voltage of the RTU is switched on, the operating states STOP (defined output state caused by an overall reset, for example), STARTUP (initialize and set flags) and RUN (process user program operation) are run through. Figure 5-1 and Table 5-1 show all transitions between operating states and the cause of the change in state.
g
Power ON Power OFF
STOP
s d
STARTUP
RUN
k
Branch from any operating state
Change operating states via Switching on the eRTU Operator input or error Test job from PG/PC
h
HALT
suc236.wmf
Fig. 5-1
CPU operating states
131
5 System Functions
Table 5-1 No. in Fig. 1 2 Transition in operating state Power ONSTOP STOPSTARTUP
Transitions between operating states and their causes Cause Criterion
Turn on power supply. Automatic: Turn on power supply. Manual: Switch Communication job: from PG, for
example
-Operating mode switch position: RUN or RUN-P, Parameter --
STARTUPSTOP
Switch Command from program Fault Communication job: from PG, for example
STARTUPRUN RUNSTOP
End of startup
Startup concluded without errors --
6/9
STARTUP/RUN HALT HALT STARTUP/RUN HALTSTOP
Test job from PG/PC Set halting point Test job from PG/PC Set halting point
PG/PC connected and reported PG/PC connected and reported --
7/10
Note: When you parameterize the startup behaviour after POWER ON activate the optionrestart or cold start. The hot restart causes operating status STOP.
132
5.3 Organization Blocks
5.3
Organization Blocks
Organization blocks (OB) control and optimize program processing in the CPU. These blocks are the interface between operating system and user program. Varying numbers of organization blocks are available in the individual CPU modules of the SICAM eRTU. The organization blocks are divided into 9 classes. The following table gives you an overview.
Table 5-2 Class
Organization blocks in the SICAM RTU OB No. Priority Priority can be changed to No 2 ... 24 2 ... 24
Start event
Free cycle Time interrupts Delay interrupts
End of last cycle or end of startup OB Date, time (e.g., repeat daily) Expiration of time started by user program Cyclic time clock pulse (10 ms ... 1 min) Hardware interrupt from DI32, AI32/ 16, CO32, CR Reception of an interrupt from the userprogram of a transmitting CPU. Not used in the SICAM RTU. Module diagnosis, Time error Stack error Power ON, Mode switch, communication task
1 10 ... 17 20 ... 23
1 (lowest) 2 3 ... 6
Cyclic interrupts
30 ... 38
7 ... 15
2 ... 24
Hardware interrupts Multiprocessorin terrupt
40 ... 47
16 ... 23
2 ... 24
60
25
No
Asynchronous errors
80 ... 87
26 (highest)
No
Startup OBs
100, 102
Can only be interrupted during startup by asynchronous errors Priority of the class in which the error occurred
No
Synchronous errors
I/O access error, Programming error
121, 122
133
5 System Functions
5.4
Diagnostic Buffer
With a programming device (PG) or a PC, you can use SIMATIC standard functions for reading out the diagnostic buffer of the CPU and of the MCP communications module. Instructions on how to do that can be found in the manuals: SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 /1/ SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Reference Manual for V5.2 /2/ SIMATIC S7/M7, Programmable Controllers Module Specifications S7-400, M7-400 /3/.
CPU-STOP
The CPU is set into STOP state due to a fatal runtime errror. Before this, an error code is entered into Battery1 and sometimes also into Battery2. A CPU stop caused by the eRTU driver can be detected as follows: 1. Checking the diagnostic circulating buffer of the CPU: One of the last commands is "STOP by STOP command" 2. Evaluation of the stacks error code in Battery.
134
5.5 Status Indications
5.5
Status Indications
System events are generated by the various components of the SICAM eRTU system and transmitted to the CPU module. Being status indications, some of them can be parameterized using SICAM plusTOOLS. System events are always identified by a component ID and a channel number. In the following table those status indications that can be parameterized are summarized according to their origin.
Table 5-3 Channel number 149 (95hex) 176 (B0hex) 192 (C0hex) 193 (C1hex) 128 (80hex) 129 (81hex) 130 (82hex) 131 (83hex) 132 (84hex) 133 (85hex) 134 (86hex) 135 (87hex)
Parameterizable status indications ID Failure indication text Origin
4 to 9 4 to 9 4 to 9 4 to 9 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129
MCP-Komp-Key <> RTC GA-Error UPF-Expert BSEND-Error Prio Low BSEND-Error Prio High OB80 Time error OB81 Power supply error OB82 Diagnostic interrupt OB83 R/I module interrupt OB84 CPU Hardware fault OB85 Program seq. error OB86 Rack failure OB87 Communication error
MCP MCP MCP MCP internal internal internal internal internal internal internal internal
135
5 System Functions
Group indications
The CPU combines selected status indications into group indications. The group faults of the I/O modules are also available as status indications; consequently, they are also entered into the SICAM Diamond event list. Single faults will only be included in the group fault indications if the diagnosis alarm of the respective module is released. All group fault indications can be configured for teletransmission to the control centre with SICAM plusTOOLS. The following table lists the fault indications generated by the CPU. The meaning of the fault numbers is described in Table 5-5.
Table 5-4 Fault 53
Status indications, group faults (generated by the CPU) Group fault Indicator input error Fault of DI CR AI CO CR DI Fault number 192, 193, 194, 196, 198, 255 192, 193, 194, 196, 198, 255 192, 193, 194, 198, 199, 255 192, 193, 194, 198, 255 192, 193, 194, 199, 200, 255 197
54 55
Measured input error Command output error
58
Chatter inhibit active
I-/O modules
The following table shows indications of the SICAM eRTU input/output modules which are part of the group faults mentioned above.
Table 5-5 Indications of the input/output modules Module DI CO CR AI DI CO CR AI DI CO CR AI Error text short/long Front_plug_missing/Front plug missing!
Alarm no. 192
C0hex 193
Synchr_failed/Synchronization failed
C1hex 194
Param_error/ Incorrect parameters received!
C2hex
136
5.5 Status Indications
Table 5-5 195
Indications of the input/output modules DI External_error
C3hex 196 DI CR Ext_aux_supply_miss/External auxiliary supply missing
C4hex 197 DI Chatter_blocking_active/ Chatter blocking active
C5hex 198 DI CO CR AI CR AI Buffer_overflow/ Buffer overflow
C6hex 199
AD_converter_error /Analog/digital converter error
C7hex 200 CR Command_out_volt_missing/ Command output voltage missing!
C8hex 201 CO CR
C9hex 244 Creeping_GI_error/ No creeping GI available!
F4hex 255 Module_unplugged/ Module unplugged!
FFhex
137
5 System Functions
Communication links
Status indications of the telecontrol and bay device links are interrogated with data type after the start-up of the MCP and transmitted to the CPU; during operation they will be transmitted only spontaneously. These indications can be configured for teletransmission to the control centre with SICAM plusTOOLS. The fault indications of the telecontrol and bay device protocols are described in the Appendix.
138
5.6 General Interrogation
5.6
General Interrogation
A general interrogation updates the network image upon system startup or prior to establishing a connection to the higher-level control centre. This is done according to the following principle: q Telecontrol application initiates general interrogation Prior to establishing a communication link to a higher-level control centre, the telecontrol application updates its network image. In the initial state, all items of information of the network image are set to invalid. The application requests the necessary data by sending a general interrogation to all components connected to it. After all components have sent their answers, the image is checked. Components process general interrogation: q Components that can answer at once to the general interrogation (because the image has already been updated or the component has direct access to process information) transmit their image at once to the component that has output the interrogation. q Components whose image has not been updated yet send general interrogations to the components connected to them. Once these general interrogations are finished and the image has been checked, it is re-transmitted to the component which requests the information. q A general interrogation end message indicates that the interrogation is complete.
139
5 System Functions
5.7
Clock Synchronization
SICAM eRTU time synchronization is done via the communications processor MCP of an MCP assembly or via the CPU module. This clock master controls the setting and synchronization of all clock slaves. If an MCP is a clock master, CPU, other MCPs, I/O modules and devices connected via the communication links are clock slaves in terms of clock control. When you configure the CPU the parameter As Slavemust be selected under Synchronization in AS, the other MCPs are configured without clock signal. When clock synchronization is done via theCPU, all MCPs must be parameterized without clock signal.
External synchronization
In the SICAM eRTU, clock setting and clock master MCP synchronization can be realized optionally by: q Time signal receiver: DCF77 GPS IRIG-B q Telegrams from control centre. For time signal reception, a SYNC-input is provided on the MCP module. Permanent checks and corrections of the quartz accuracy ensure that the absolute time kept by the clock master does not deviate more than 1 ms from the reference time. With synchronization via telegram from the control centre, the accuracy is 10 ms. Upon failure of the external synchronization, the clock status is set to not synchronized. If there is no external synchronization for more than 6 minutes, the internal absolute time will deviate by more than 1 ms and the clock status will change to invalid.
140
5.7 Clock Synchronization
Synchronization of the system
The internal synchronization by the clock master is performed once a minute. The I/O modules work with a resolution of 1ms and an accuracy of 2ms on that time base. Bay devices, which are synchronized via communication links, have a maximum deviation of 20 ms.
Without external synchronization
After reset or pulling/plugging in the MCP assembly, the MCP communications processor takes over the time set by the CPU clock. If the MCP is the clock master, it uses this CPU time until it receives its external clock signal again. The normalized clock signal IRIG-B does not contain the year. Therefore, when the hardware configuration is compiled by SICAM plusTOOLS the year is supplemented by the current year. It can be changed any time during the runtime via the SIMATC Manger. To this end, mark the MCP assembly which takes over the clock control and select via the context menuTarget system Set clock.
Synchronization with IRIG-B
141
5 System Functions
142
Functions of the Digital Input Module

This chapter describes the functions of the digital input module. The last section of the chapter explains the corresponding parameters.
Contents
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
State Capturing Indications of the DI Bitstrings Transformer Taps Metered Value Capturing Parameters of the DI Module
144 145 147 148 149 150
143
6 Functions of the Digital Input Module
6.1
State Capturing
The state capturing function is the default setting for all inputs. It causes the module to be operated in standard S7 mode, i.e. in process image mode. All process signals which are present at the inputs of the digital input module are written cyclically into the process input image (PII).
Note: The process image on the module is always updated cyclically, even if all inputs are parameterized for request mode.
144
6.2 Indications of the DI
6.2
Indications of the DI
In telecontrol engineering and substation control and protection, binary process signals are called indications. They identify the states of the devices (sensors, switches) which are assigned to them. Indication changes are captured chronologically with a resolution of 1 ms on the DI digital input module. We distinguish between the following indication types:
q q q
Fleeting indication Single-point indication Double-point indication
Single-point indication
The single-point indication occupies only one input on the module. It can represent two states of a device (e.g. ON/OFF). Each change of the input signal from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 (rising edge and falling edge of the indication) results in a data entry in the EPE event buffer and an update of the PII process image.
Fleeting indication
The fleeting indication occupies only one input on the module. Each change of the input signal updates the PII process image. However, only the change of the input signal from 0 to 1 (rising edge of the indication) results in a data entry in the EPE event buffer.
Double-point indication
A double-point indication can represent two determined states of a device (e.g. ON/OFF) and two undetermined states (intermediate positions). Undetermined states are represented by two identical bits. The individual states and their meanings are listed in Table 6-1. A double-point indication always occupies two inputs on the module. The first input is always even-numbered (e.g. I2.0), and the OFF state must be assigned to it. Each change of the input signals results in a data entry in the EPE event buffer and an update of the PII process image.
145
If double-point indications are parameterized with intermediate position suppression, the time stamp indicates the moment when the doublepoint indication reaches a determined state or, in case of an undetermined state, the moment when the intermediate position suppression time expires. In order to prevent for example that an intermediate position is transmitted when a circuit-breaker switches, an intermediate position suppression time (e.g. 300 ms) can be parameterized.
Table 6-1 States of a double-point indication Signal level of first input e.g. I2.0
0 1 0 1
Signal level of second input, e.g. I2.1

0 0 1 1
Meaning
Intermediate position (fault position) OFF ON Fault (fault position)
146
6.3 Bitstrings
6.3
Bitstrings
The bit pattern capturing function makes it possible to acquire freely definable device states using several inputs (e.g. encoded sensor value).
Entry into event buffer
After one of the following events, data are written into the event buffer:
q q
Internal trigger External trigger The inputs I3.5, I3.6 and I3.7 are permanently assigned to the external trigger.
147
6.4
Transformer Taps
The transformer tap function makes it possible to acquire all determined and undetermined states of transformer tap sensors using several inputs. Upon start of tap changing (signal change from 0 to 1 at the moving contact input), the monitoring time is started. After the transformer taps have changed and tap changing is finished (signal change from 1 to 0 at the moving contact input), the data are transferred and the monitoring time is reset. Monitoring of the moving contact can be parameterized.
Fault processing
Fault processing ensures that the current state of the transformer tap position is always transmitted. If the moving contact exceeds the parameterized monitoring time, the current tap position value with set moving contact is transferred as fault identification and the trigger is set. If the external fault input is connected and is set, the present tap position value is transferred with set error bit and the trigger is set. The falling edge of a moving contact which has been present for too long or of an external fault results in the present tap position value being transferred once again and in a trigger being set.
148
6.5 Metered Value Capturing
6.5
Metered Value Capturing

With this function, meter pulses of external meter pulse generators are captured and added up. The DI module keeps a counting memory and a transfer memory for each of the 16 metered values (maximum). The captured pulses are counted into the counting memory. By means of a restore procedure, the contents of the counting memory is moved to the transfer memory. The contents of the transfer memory is made available for collection by the CPU. Metered value capturing can be selected for groups of 4 metered values (i.e., for entire bytes) on the DI module. Unused metered value inputs within a byte cannot be parameterized for indication acquisition. The metered value functions can be parameterized separately for each metered value. With each restore procedure, the restore status bit in the data record is inverted. Thus the CPU is able to check whether there has been a restore procedure. In case of a voltage failure and/or system stop, the pulses which have been added up so far are lost.
Fault processing
In the data record, two error status bits are kept:

q
external error bit The external error bit represents the state of the fault signal input (if parameterized). internal error bit The internal error bit is set after the startup of the DI module and is deleted after the second restore procedure.
149
6.6
Parameters of the DI Module

On the following pages, the parameters of the digital input module are described in alphabetical order.
Note: Activate only those inputs which you use. This speeds up the processing time. The process image of the deactivated inputs is updated nevertheless.
Evaluation of external error bit (transformer taps) Trigger delay (single-point indication, fleeting indication,doublepoint indication
If a signal is present at the external fault input and this option is activated, the present tap position value is transferred with set error bit and the trigger is set. The additional delay in processing an edge change, which is controlled by the trigger delay function, ensures suppression of:
q q q
automatic reclosing strong contact chatter disturbing pulses and voltage drops on the signal lines.
The maximum trigger delay time which can be parameterized is 25.5 s (for comparison: hardware filter timemax. 64 msec). The trigger delay time is independent of the hardware filter time.
Note: Especially when parameterizing fleeting indications, please observe that the total delay time of a signal input is the sum of hardware filter time plus trigger delay time.
150
6.6 Parameters of the DI Module
When calculating the time stamp, the trigger delay time and the hardware filter time are taken into consideration by the internal microprocessor of the DI module.
1. Trigger with rising edge of an indication

80 % 10 Z 20 30 Trigger delay time 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
t (ms)
Rising edge of indication is detected
2. Filtering of disturbing pulses at signal input

80 % 10 Z 20 30 Trigger delay time 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
t (ms)
Rising edge of indication not detected
3. Trigger with retriggerable delay time

80 % 10 Z Z = Hardware filter time (here: 2 ms) Trigger delay time (here: 50 ms) 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
t (ms)
Trigger delay time Rising edge of indication is detected Z = Time stamp SUC027
Fig. 6-1
Principle of operation of the trigger delay
151
Bit pattern trigger (bit pattern)
The bit patterns which are present at the inputs are written into the event buffer after:
q q
external trigger smoothing time.
The external trigger is captured by the fourth input byte (i.e., byte 3). The inputs of this byte are permanently assigned to the first three input bytes.
1 x 16 bits 1 x 8 bits+ 1 x 16 bits 1 x 24 bits
I0.0 I0.1 I0.2 I0.3 I0.4 I0.5 I0.6 I0.7 I1.0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I2.0 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I3.0 I3.1 I3.2 I3.3 I3.4 I3.5 I3.6 I3.7
1 x 8 bits
ETI3 ETI2 ETI2 ETI2 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1 ETI = input for external trigger = input not assigned (free)
SUC023
Fig. 6-2
Input assignment for bit pattern acquisition
The bitstring time-out ensures that all binary digits of encoded bit patterns have settled safely and are present in a stable way before processing starts. The recovery time can be parameterized between 0 s and 25.5 s in increments of 0.1 s. In all other respects, the effect and the behavior of this function correspond to those of the retriggerable trigger delay time.
152
2 x 8 bits
Input
3 x 8 bits
Diagnosis alarm release
The diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. The diagnosis alarm must always be activated in order to ensure that the fault indication is available to the CPU. Either only rising or rising and falling meter pulse edges are processed.
q
Recorded meter pulse edge (metered value)
Meter pulses with evaluation of the rising edge (unidirectional current pulse): The counting memory is incremented in case of a signal change from 0 to 1 at the meter pulse input. Meter pulses with evaluation of the rising and falling pulse edge (bidirectional current pulse): The counting memory is incremented in case of a signal change from 0 to 1 and from 1 to 0 at the meter pulse input.
Chatter blocking (single-point indication, fleeting indication, doublepoint indication, bit pattern, transformer taps)
Defective sensors or interposing relays generate enormous event-signal bursts through permanent signal changes (the so-called signal chatter), which may eventually lead to a system overload. In order to avoid this phenomenon, it is possible to parameterize an automatic signal blocking. Each status change increments a counter which is assigned to the input. It is checked whether the status changes reach a parameterizable amount within a time window (control time). If the admissible amount of status changes is exceeded, the corresponding input is disabled and a chatter blocking status indication is transmitted to the CPU (fault indication). After a defined time interval (blocking time), it is checked whether the signal continues to chatter. If it does not chatter any longer, it is deblocked and the current status is transmitted to the CPU. If the signal continues to chatter, the blocking is upheld and the corresponding check is performed once again after another time interval.
Hardware filter time (all functions)
Each one of the inputs I0.0 to I3.7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The applied input voltage is compared to a reference voltage for each input group (I0.x to I3.x). This reference voltage is directly proportional to the applied signaling-circuit voltage (US0 to US3). If the input voltage present at inputs I0.0 to I3.7 exceeds approx. 80 % of the signaling voltage, the binary status 1 is detected.
153
% 100
Signal level
80
1 signal Signal profile 0 signal
0.25 ms Sampling time

0 0,5 1
1,5
2,5
t (ms)
Digital filter (shift register)
Parameterized filter time (here: 1 ms) Status change to "1" recognized: process change is processed Absolute time of change is calculated back to the beginning of the filter time.
SUC027
Fig. 6-3
Principle of operation of the input filter
The hardware filter eliminates transient conditions of the process signal. It can be parameterized in increments of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 ms. Fault position suppression time (double-point indication) When a double-point indication changes from a determined state (e.g. OFF) to another (e.g. ON), then both input signals temporarily pass an undetermined state, the fault position. In order to suppress the fault position indication, a suppression time can be parameterized. Upon expiration of the parameterized fault position suppression time, the fault position is transmitted with the current time stamp. We recommend parameterizing always a minimum fault position suppression time of e.g. 300 ms for double-point indications. Transformer tap trigger The transformer tap values which are present at the inputs are written into the event buffer after:
q q
expiration of the moving contact monitoring time expiration of the transformer tap smoothing time.
If you parameterize Moving contact as transformer tap trigger type, then the data are written into the event buffer after a transformer tap change in the following cases:
q q
The moving contact indicates a constant position (falling pulse of the moving contact) The parameterized moving contact monitoring time has been exceeded.
154
Note: Please make sure that you parameterize an interval which is long enough to allow the tap changer to conclude its regulation procedure.
If you parameterize After smoothing time as transformer tap trigger type, then the data are transferred after a transformer tap change as soon as the transformer tap smoothing time has expired. During this time, the transformer tap value stays present without any change at the inputs. For both trigger types, you can parameterize a time between 0s and 25.5s in increments of 0.1s. The default setting is 2 s. Transformer tap encoding When capturing transformer taps, the following types of encoding are possible:
q q q
Dual code (admissible transformer tap values: 0 to 63) BCD code (admissible transformer tap values: 0 to 39) (1-out-of-n) code (admissible transformer tap values: 1 to number of occupied inputs).
155
Input
Dual code Function 20 21 22 Transfor23 mer step 24 25 Error bit Moving Contact
BCD code Function 20 21 Units 22 Transfor23 mer step 4 2 Tens 25 Error bit (EB) Moving contact (MC)
Ix.0 Ix.1 Ix.2 Ix.3 Ix.4 Ix.5 Ix.6 Ix.7
(1-out-of-n) code Transformer tap value with Input 8 bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (EB) 8 (MC) 16 bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (EB) 16 (MC) 24 bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 (EB) 24 (MC) 32 bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 (EB) 32 (MC)
I0.0 I0.1 I0.2 I0.3 I0.4 I0.5 I0.6 I0.7 I1.0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I2.0 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I3.0 I3.1 I3.2 I3.3 I3.4 I3.5 I3.6 I3.7
SUC024
Fig. 6-4
Transformer tap encoding
A transformer tap indication in dual code always occupies 8 inputs. 6 inputs of which are reserved for transformer taps and one input is reserved for moving contact and one for fault indication. Admissible transformer taps are the values between 0 and 63. The input assignment is shown in Figure 6-4.
156
A transformer tap indication in BCD code also occupies always 8 inputs. 4 inputs of which are reserved for the units of the transformer taps, 2 inputs for the tens and one input each for moving contact and fault indication. Admissible transformer taps are the values between 0 and 39. The input assignment is shown in Figure 6-4. The BCD value is converted to a dual value by the digital input module. Transformer tap indications with (1-out-of-n) encoding are possible with (1-out-of-6), (1-out-of-14), (1-out-of-22) and (1-out-of-30) inputs. Moving contact and fault indication always occupy, if present, the last two inputs. The highest value here depends on the number of the occupied inputs. The assignment of the inputs is shown in Figure 6-4. The (1-out-of-n) value is converted to a dual value by the digital input module. Restoring (metered value During the restore procedure, the internal counting memory is copied to a transfer memory. The contents of the transfer memory is sent to the CPU in request mode. If you activate Erase counting memory, the counting memory is cleared after the restore procedure. This corresponds to a metered value with reset function. If you deactivate Erase counting memory, the counting memory retains its contents after the restore procedure and further meter pulses are added to it. This corresponds to a metered value without reset function. The Restore trigger determines the intervals at which the internal counting memory (see Restore trigger via) is copied. You can parameterize 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min and 60 min for the restorage trigger. The default setting is 15 min. Restorage trigger (metered value) The restore trigger may come from:
q q q
internal clock CPU order external input.
The above options can also be activated simultaneously. When the trigger comes from an internal clock, you parameterize the restore interval user-specifically. When the trigger is set by CPU order, you can choose between initiating the restore procedure by a restore command from the control center or from the HMI station or by a derived restore command. When you activate external input, the odd-numbered input channel is used as restore input; otherwise this input is used as fault signal input.
157
158
Functions of the Analog Input Modules

This chapter explains measured value capturing on the analog input module and describes the corresponding parameters.
Contents
7.1 7.2
Measured Value Capturing Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules
160 161
159
7 Functions of the Analog Input Modules
7.1
Measured Value Capturing

The analog process signals which are present at the inputs of the analog input module are referred to as measured values. The measured values are sampled cyclically one after the other via the multiplexer, converted and written into the process input image (PII). If parameterized, the measured values are furthermore chronologically written into the event buffer (EPE) with a resolution of 1 ms, with additional information.
Input area / measuring range
Measuring ranges which belong together are grouped into input areas. In order to optimize the measuring accuracy, a specific reference voltage is provided for each input area. Parameterization of a measuring range can be realized only within the input area assigned to it, even on one module. Thus recalibrations are avoided, which would otherwise prolong the encoding time considerably.
160
7.2 Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules
7.2
Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules

On the following pages, the parameters of the analog input modules are described in alphabetical order. Note: Activate only those inputs which you use. This speeds up the processing time. The process image of the deactivated inputs is updated nevertheless.
A diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. When the diagnosis alarm is activated, the fault indication is forwarded to the CPU. An identical input area must be parameterized for all inputs of the AI module. The input area is always valid for the whole module. You can choose one of the ranges of values which are listed in the following table:
Table 7-1 Ranges of values for the inputs of the AI-C or AI-V module AI-C (current input)
1 mA 20 mA Standard setting 24 mA
Input area
AI-V (voltage input)

1V 6V 10 V Standard setting
Event buffer input
The event buffer input must be activated, otherwise no events are written into the EPE event buffer of the inputs. The measured values are written chronologically into the EPE after threshold processing, complemented with additional information. The time resolution is 1 ms. With additive threshold processing, the measured value which was last written into the EPE event buffer of the inputs, the old value, remains stored. Each new value resulting from a measuring signal conversion is compared to the stored old value. The differences to the old value are added with the correct sign in the addition buffer. When the sum exceeds the parameterized threshold, there is an event generation, i.e. the current measured value is written into the EPE with time stamp. This newlyentered measured value remains stored as the "new" old value, and the addition buffer is reset to 0.
161
+ 3,0
2,0 Parameterized threshold 1,0 Measure value profile t
-1,0 Sampling of intervals 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,5 0,0 -0,8 -0,4 0,0 0,2 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,5 0,0 -0,8 -0,4 0,0 0,2 0,6 0,0 0,6 1,0 1,4 1,8 2,2 2,6 2,9 1,2 0,4 0,3 0,1 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 1,0 1,0 1,8 1,8 2,6 2,6 1,2 1,2 0,3 0,3 0,3 0,3 1,0 0,4 0,8 0,4 0,8 0,3 -1,4 -0,8 -0,9 -0,2 -0,3 -0,3 -0,3 1,1 0,4 1,2 0,4 1,2 0,3 -1,1 -0,8 -1,7 -0,2 -0,5 -0,8 -1,1 Measured value (absolute) "Old value" Difference to "Old value" Contents of addition buffer Moment of event generation 0,0 1,0 1,8 2,6 1,2 0,3 0,0 Measured value written into EPE SUC028
0,0 0,0 0,5 0,5 -0,3 -0,7 -0,7 -0,5 0,1
Fig. 7-1
Principle of the additive threshold function
This processing principle corresponds to the VDEW recommendation. If you parameterize a threshold of 0 %, all converted measured values are written into the event buffer. Note: In view of the data volume which would be generated, we do not recommend parameterizing a threshold < 3 % for more than just a few inputs. Please observe that with additive threshold processing, also lasting changes of the measuring signal which are smaller than the parameterized threshold result in an entry in the EPE as soon as the sum of these minor changes is equal to this threshold.
Measuring range
Here you define the measuring range for each input. What measuring ranges can be selected depends on the set input area. You have the choice between symmetrical or asymmetrical ranges. The zero suppression serves for stabilizing the converted values which are near zero. The portion of the measuring range that is to be suppressed is set in percent. All measured values within that measuring range portion are set to zero.
Zero suppression
162
7.2 Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules
Encoding start value in seconds
When you set a synchronous encoding start, the sampling cycle starts at the interval which has been parameterized in Encoding start value in seconds. The beginning of a cycle is related to the absolute system time. The default setting for the encoding start value in seconds with synchronous start is 15 s, i.e. the sampling cycle starts at 0, 15, 30, 45 seconds.
Interference voltage suppression
In this box, you indicate the frequency of your supply network for filtering supply-side interference signals out from the measured values. In addition to the 16 2/3, 50 and 60 Hz network frequencies, the frequency range of the interference voltage suppression can be parameterized in integer values from 1 to 100 Hz and is valid for all inputs of a module. The default setting is 50 Hz.
Encoding start
The inputs of the analog input module are read out one after the other, and the measured values converted to digital values. The beginning of this process can be parameterized as:
q q
asynchronous synchronous
When you select an asynchronous encoding start, the measured values are captured continuously. When you set a synchronous encoding start, the sampling cycle starts at the interval which has been parameterized in Encoding start value in seconds. The beginning of a cycle is related to the absolute system time.
Measured values snapshot With input 0, you capture measured values with threshold 0 % every second (synchronous encoding start, 1 s). Recommendation: We recommend you to parameterize a threshold of at least 3 % for the other inputs.
Note: If you want to capture values with an encoding start value in seconds of 1 s, you must deactivate at least one input. Reason: On the AI-32 module, one acquisition cycle takes 1005 ms when all inputs are activated and an identical measuring range has been parameterized for all inputs. With different measuring ranges, one cycle takes even longer.
163
164
Functions of the Command Output Module

This chapter describes the functions of the command output module.
Contents
8.1 8.2 8.3
Command Output Module Digital Output Parameters of the CO Module
166 168 169
165
8 Functions of the Command Output Module
8.1
Command Output Module

The CO command output module can output commands in request mode and in process image mode. The commands in request mode can be parameterized as:
q q
Single command Double command
8.1.1
Single Commands
Single commands occupy only one output, which is used for setting the corresponding process state to ON or OFF:
Command is executed Command is concluded
output voltage is switched through output voltage is disconnected
load disconnecting relay is ON load disconnecting relay is OFF
Output type
The maximum amount of single commands depends on the output type.

.
Table 8-1
Single command assignment of a CO module Output type*

1-pole 1 1/2-pole 32 2-pole 16
Max. amount of single commands * see Chapter 3.4.2
32
Typical applications
q q q q
Resetting a transient earth-fault relay Restore signal for counter Interrupt acknowledgment General production control tasks.
166
8.1 Command Output Module
8.1.2
Double Commands
Double commands always occupy two outputs. They cause the OFF or ON process state, with the first output having the OFF function and the second one the ON function. The two outputs of a double command can never be activated simultaneously. When configuring the outputs, the following points have to be taken into account:
q q
With 1-pole wiring, the OFF function of the double command can only be assigned to even-numbered outputs. With 2-pole wiring, the OFF function of the double command can only be assigned to the outputs 00/01, 04/05, etc. to 14/15.
Output type
The maximum amount of double commands depends on the output type.

Table 8-2 Double command assignment of a CO module Output type*
1-pole Max. amount of double commands Function OFF assigned to * see Chapter 3.4.2 16 even-numbered outputs 1 1/2-pole 16 even-numbered outputs 2-pole 8 the outputs: 00/01, 04/05, etc. to 14/15
Typical applications
q q
Control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground electrodes Transformer tap changing up/down.
167
8.2
Digital Output
The digital output function allows the simultaneous and time-independent setting or resetting of single or multiple outputs. Bit patterns or digital setpoint values are output in the "digital output" operating mode. The output is realized in process image mode, whereby the monitoring functions which are incorporated on the CO function module (e.g. comparison of the output bit pattern to the process image, continuous self-test and diagnostics function, etc.) are used.
Caution: Restrictions for digital output: Digital outputs must not occupy more than 16 digits (independently of the wiring). With 1-pole wiring, only outputs which are located on the same selection line (UI0 or UI1, see Figure 3-9 ) can be used for a digital output, i.e. only even-numbered outputs.
168
8.3 Parameters of the CO Module
8.3
Parameters of the CO Module

The command parameters of the command output module are described below in alphabetical order.
Note: Activate only those outputs which you use. This speeds up the processing time.
Command
On the command output module, you can parameterize the following command types:
q q
SC (single command) DC (double command).
If you have selected 2-pole command output or double commands, every second output or every second output pair is
q
functionally assigned (FA).
A diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. When the diagnosis alarm is activated, the fault indication is forwarded to the CPU.
169
170
Functions of the Command Release Module

This chapter describes the functions of the command release module. At the end of the chapter the parameters of the command release module are explained.
Contents
9.1 9.2 9.3
Inputs of the CR Module Outputs of the CR Module Parameters of the Command Release Module
172 173 174
171
9 Functions of the Command Release Module
9.1
9.1.1
Inputs of the CR Module

Indications of the CR Module
For operation in request mode, the following indication types can be assigned to the inputs of the CR module:
q q
single-point indication or fleeting indication.
These types of indications are described in the chapter Indications of the DI in detail see Chapter 6.2).
9.1.2
State Capturing
The state capturing function is the default setting for all inputs. This function causes the process signals which are present at the inputs of the command release module to be written into the process input image (PII) cyclically (process image mode).
Note: The process image on the module is always updated cyclically, even if other functions have been parameterized for all inputs.
172
9.2 Outputs of the CR Module
9.2
9.2.1
Outputs of the CR Module

Digital Output of the CR Module
The digital output function allows the simultaneous and time-independent setting or resetting of single or multiple outputs. It is only possible with operation in process image mode (see also Chapter 8.2). The following outputs are provided on the CR command release module:
q q
4 outputs as changeover contacts 4 outputs as normally open contacts.
Via the APA job buffer, the CPU hands over structured jobs to the CR module for further processing. These jobs include: q Check / release jobs
q q q
release of the command output circuit electrical isolation check of the command output circuit switching current check
General control jobs. The CR module answers these jobs with process feedbacks. As soon as these are ready for collection by the CPU, the CR module issues a hardware interrupt.
Note: Safe and reliable command output is possible in combination with CO modules. The individual command circuits are parameterized via SICAM plusTOOLS (assignment of the CO module to the respective CR module). You will find related information in SICAM eRTU, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks /15/.
Note: Job-controlled outputs are not supported by the SICAM eRTU!
173
9 Functions of the Command Release Module
9.3
Parameters of the Command Release Module

The parameters of the command release module are listed below.
Note: Activate only those inputs which you use. This speeds up the processing time. The process image of the deactivated inputs is updated nevertheless.
Trigger delay (single-point indication)
The additional delay in processing an edge change, which is controlled by the trigger delay function, ensures suppression of:
q q q
automatic reclosing strong contact chatter disturbing pulses and voltage drops on the signal lines.
The maximum trigger delay time which can be parameterized is 25.5 s (for comparison: hardware filter time max. 64 ms). The trigger delay time is independent of the hardware filter time.
Note: Especially when parameterizing fleeting indications, please observe that the total delay time of a signal input is the sum of hardware filter time plus trigger delay time.
The diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. The diagnosis alarm must always be activated in order to ensure that the fault indication is available to the CPU. Each one of the inputs I0.0 to I3.7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The applied input voltage is compared to a reference voltage for each input group (I0.x to I3.x). This reference voltage is directly proportional to the applied signaling-circuit voltage (US0 to US3). If the input voltage present at inputs I0.0 to I3.7 exceeds approx. 80 % of the signaling voltage, the binary status 1 is detected.
Hardware filter time (single-point indication, fleeting indication,doublepoint indication)
174
Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS

Overview The SICAM eRTU is configured with SICAM plusTOOLS. SICAM plusTOOLS includes applications for configuring and parameterizing the SICAM eRTU Controllers and its communication with telecontrol and bay devices.
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.7
Configuring and Parameterizing the SICAM eRTU Communication with Bay Devices/Substations Information Configuration Telecontrol Communication Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data
176 177 179 180 185
175
10 Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS
10.1 Configuring and Parameterizing the SICAM eRTU

The hardware configuration application of SICAM plusTOOLS is used to configure the SICAM eRTU Contoller according to your needs. You simply copy the racks and modules from a Hardware Catalog and place them in the hardware configuration window. The racks are displayed as tables, the slots as consecutively numbered rows of the tables. Connections between the central rack and the expansion racks are drawn as connecting lines. The hardware parameters of the modules are specified in the modulespecific parameter sheets which you select by simply double-clicking on the modules. The parameters have plausible default values, so that the input is limited to parameters which depend on the specific hardware environment into which the SICAM eRTU Controller is to be integrated. After arranging and parameterizing all modules, you complete the configuration by saving and closing the HW configuration application. By saving the HW configuration all SAS information items of the SICAM eRTU Controller are generated. They are then available to all SICAM applications. It is possible to modify the hardware configuration later.
Note: For details on how to configure and parameterize the SICAM eRTU hardware, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/.
176
10.2 Communication with Bay Devices/Substations
10.2 Communication with Bay Devices/Substations

Bay devices Use the SICAM plusTOOLS application COM IED (Communication to Intelligent Electronic Devices) to integrate bay devices with
q q
IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 (COM IED)
Protocols in your SICAM eRTU. Transfer the bay devices from a catalog and determine the functional scope and information volume of the devices by parameterizing their version numbers. The bay devices are connected to the communication interfaces of the MCP assemblies. Up to 32 devices with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP V3.00 protocol can be connected to one MCP channel. If busbar protection is connected up to 48 devices per channel are possible. By means of the object properties of the device you determine the interface where it is to be connected to an MCP assembly. Open import interfaces allow you to insert and parameterize userdefinable devices with the IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP V3.00 protocols or to import externally parameterized bay device data as a dBase file. This function is used, for instance, to take over the data from SIPROTEC 4 devices which were parameterized with DIGSI. Bay devices with the PROFIBUS DP interface are connected to the DP interface of the CPU module and parameterized during hardware configuration. Substations The communication interfaces of the MCP assemblies permit connection of substations that can communicate with the SICAM eRTU Controller by means of the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. These include
q q q q q q
SICAM SC SICAM RTU SICAM miniRTU SICAM microRTU SINAUT LSA third-party stations.
Substation connections are also inserted from the catalog and configured separately according to control and monitoring direction.
177
The catalogue
The catalog of the COM IED application contains the substation connection IEC 60870-5-101 and all bay devices that can be integrated. The bay devices are hierarchically structured according to the protocols: q DNP V3.00
q q
DPU2000 User-definable device Bay controllers User-definable device Protection devices Other and third-party manufacturers
IEC 60870-5-103
q q q q
By saving the configuration the device information is imported in SICAM plusTOOLS, linked with SAS information and stored under the device name. It can then be reduced and structured according to the application. If you change the version number, the current data will be compared with the set of indications and commands of the new version. Identical information items are taken over, missing information items are inserted and non-existent information items are deleted.
Note: For details on how to configure and parameterize the bay device and substation interface, please refer to the SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/.
178
10.3 Information Configuration
10.3 Information Configuration

Use the SICAM plusTOOLS application SIM (SICAM Information Manager) to configure
q q
the information for communication with the control centre or the information for logging or command output through SICAM Diamond
that you want to use. All items of information of the SICAM eRTU can be identified via unique Hierarchical Names. They describe the input / output address of each individual item of SAS information and its position within the station topology. Distribution in control direction In control direction, all commands are distributed which are to be processed by the system (e.g. commands to the CO modules, the bay devices and the substations). You can assign a feedback to each command. Distribution in monitoring direction All indications, measured values and metered values which are to be processed within the system are distributed in monitoring direction. This includes:
q q
indications from the function modules indications from the connected bay devices and substations
Status information
Status information of the bay devices, modules, communication links, etc., are created automatically during configuration and parameterization and can be processed just like normal indications or commands. In the object properties of the status information you define if you want to provide data for the export to SICAM Diamond and if you want to use the functions Event list logging and Control.
Modifying the parameterization
All default designations and the distribution of information can be easily modified at any time. This permits you to manually create information which you need additionally or to reassign existing information. Changes are automatically updated in all applications upon saving.
Note: For detailed information on the handling and edit functions of SIM, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/.
179
10.4 Telecontrol Communication

COM TC The SICAM plusTOOLS application COM TC (Communication to Telecontrol Center) serves for parameterizing telecontrol links to higherlevel control centres. You select the telegrams you want to transmit, define their telecontrol addresses, set transmission parameters and assign the telegrams to the lists you want to use for transmitting them. What information for communication with the control centre is required, is configured in the SIM table. The address structure depends on the settings you have specified for the transmission channel in the Hardware Configuration. Transmission protocols The following telecontrol protocols to higher-level control centres are supported:
q q q q q q
IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP) SINAUT 8-FW DNP V3.00 TELEGYR 800 TELEGYR 8979
180
10.4 Telecontrol Communication
Protocol combinations
For communication of the SICAM eRTU with higher-level control centres, up to two different telecontrol protocols can be combined per MCP. When a substation is connected (via protocol IEC 60870-5-101), different protocols to higher-level control centres can be used. The protocol combinations which can be used are given in the following table.
Table 10-1
Protocol combinations Corresponding protocol combinations to substations/devices IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
Protocol combinations to control centres
SINAUT 8-FW, IEC 60870-5-101 DNP V3.00, IEC 60870-5-101 DNP V3.00, SINAUT 8-FW TELEGYR 800, IEC 60870-5-101 TELEGYR 800, SINAUT 8-FW TELEGYR 800, DNP V3.00 SINAUT 8-FW
DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800
TELEGYR 8979
IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-104
181
Transmisstion parameters
In addition, you can specify different transmission parameters for each telegram in COM TC. Thus, for example, you can parameterize for each short-time indication an individual retention time, or for each double-point indication an individual fault position suppression time. For a detailed description of the parameters, please refer to onlinehelp and SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS / 14/.
Telecontrol lists
Furthermore, COM TC allows you to combine telecontrol lists for transmission, i.e. you choose the desired list type from a telecontrol list catalog, give the list an individual name and assign the telegrams you want to transmit with this list to it. For each list, you define the transmission priority and different list-typespecific transmission parameters (e.g. number of telegrams per trigger, group number, etc.). You can choose between the following list types:
q q q q q q q q
Interrogation list Initiation buffer list Basic cycle list Telegram buffer list with time stamp: Telegram buffer list without time stamp Subordinate basic cycle list Counter-controlled list Time-controlled list
A telegram can be included in several lists. Modifying parameters Like in all other applications of SICAM plusTOOLS, you can modify the parameters, addresses or list assignments at any time. The parameter lists are updated during the next compilation. When information is deleted in other applications of the configuration system SICAM plusTOOLS, the COM TC is updated.
Note: For more information about configuration and parameterization refer to SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/.
182
10.5 SICAM CFC
10.5 SICAM CFC

SICAM CFC is a graphical configuration system used to realize userspecific functions. In SICAM eRTU it is used, e.g. for:
q q q
linking SAS information to derived information configuring locking conditions and switching sequences integrating bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface.
A variety of logical CFC modules are available for this. The graphic interface of the CFC application simplifies the configuration and gives the links in a clear overview. For details about the CFC configuration, please refer to the SICAM eRTU, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks /15/
183
10.6 SICAM Diamond

SICAM Diamond is used for diagnostic purposes of system information such as module data, bay device data, communication links, etc. SICAM plusTOOLS provides the required data of the SICAM eRTU in a *.xml file for import by SICAM Diamond. SICAM Diamond can also be used for control and logging information items in an event list. You define in the SICAM plusTOOLS application SIM what information is used for this purpose.
Note: For details on working with SICAM Diamond, please refer to the manual SICAM Diamond /19/. You will find information about diagnostic features also in chapter 5.
184
10.7 Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data
10.7 Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data

Before the project data are downloaded to the target system, they must be compiled into system data blocks that can be read internally. Data must be compiled in the order stated below because each compilation procedure requires the previous one as input: 1. Compile and save in HW Config. 2. Compile for the target system in SICAM Information Manager. After correct compilation of all configured data, the system blocks are ready for transmission to the target system. Please observe the correct order for loading into the target system: 1. load the substation data onto the memory card of the CPU 2. download the firmware of the MCP assemblies 3. download the system data of the MCP assemblies
Note: The procedure is described in SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/ and in the manual SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions /17/ .
SICAM Report
The SICAM Report logs the compilation run in a detailed way with:
q q q q
status symbol designation of the log text date time
It contains the Overview tab card and a tab card specific to the substation. The tab cards are automatically generated during compilation.
185
186
Communication with the Control Center

This chapter is intended to give you an overview of the principle of communication and the telegram structure for a data exchange with the control center. Contents 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 Data Exchange with the Control Center Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-104 Telegram Control Center Link with the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram Control Center Link with the DNP V3.00 Telegram Control Center Link with the TELEGYR 800 Telegram 188 201 223 242 262 275
187
11 Communication with the Control Center
11.1 Data Exchange with the Control Center

Adapted to the tasks of the SICAM eRTU system and the special environmental conditions involved in the automation of geographically widespread processes, data communication meets the following requirements: q Safe transmission Effective protection of the telegrams is ensured when errors in data transmission occur due to electromagnetic fields, differences in the grounding potential, aging components and other sources of interference and noise on the transmission channels.
q q q q
Bit and telegram errors are recognized. Loss of information is recognized. Undesired information cannot be created. Related information cannot be separated or otherwise adversely affected.
Priority-controlled provision of telegrams Event-triggered telegrams are made available quickly thanks to priority control.
Efficient transmission of information A wide variety of telegram types with task-related information and a highresolution clock ensure that further processing by both the SICAM eRTU and the control center meets the demands of actual practice.
11.1.1 Types of Modulation

The SICAM eRTU system uses the following types of modulation for the bit-serial transmission of telegrams:
q q
Pulse code modulation (PCM) Digital pulse duration modulation DPDM (SINAUT 8-FW)
verwendet. Pulse code modulation (PCM) In pulse code modulation, each character of a data byte has the same length. The information of the character is expressed by the levels low and high (standard: logical "0" = low and logical "1" = high). The data byte consists of the following:
q q q q
a start bit (always a logical "0" level) 8 data bits a parity bit (makes the data bits with "1" level into an even number) a stop bit (always logical "1" level)
188
Time (for transmission speed of 200 bits/sec)

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
[ms]
110
Pulse code modulated information
Binary information
+ 20 21 (2) 22 23 24 information 8 (16) 25 32 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Start bit
Parity Stop bit bit

(= '1')
(= '0') (1)
1. Data byte
0 1 0
(4)
64 (128)
(Start bit 1 = 68hex = 104dez)
Logical signals
0 0 1
(block length = 06 hex)
2. Data byte
0 0 0
0
suc210.wmf
Fig. 11-1 Principle of pulse code modulation (PCM)
The transmission duration of a telegram depends on the number of data bytes. Transmission speeds of up to 64 kbits/sec are possible. Digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM) In pulse duration modulation logical "0" is represented by a short character and logical "1" by a long character. A change of edge takes place after every bit. The ratio of short character to long character is between 1:2.2 and 1:3.0, depending on the parameterization.
Time (for transmission speed of 200 bits/sec)
0 10 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 [ms]
Pulse duration modulated information
Binary information
33 ms Inhibition time (= 3 long characters) 5ms Short characters 11 ms Long characters (2.2*short characters)
Logical signals
0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1
suc211.wmf
Fig. 11-2 Principle of digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM)
The transmission duration of a telegram depends on the number of long characters. Transmission speeds of up to 1200 bits/sec are possible.
189
11.1.2 Types of Communication

The transmission mode defines the data transmission procedure between the SICAM eRTU and the control center. Possible modes are:
q q
Symmetric transmission procedure (point-to-point) Asymmetric transmission procedure (polling)
Symmetric transmission procedure

(Balanced Mode, point-to-point)
With this type of transmission, the SICAM eRTU and the control center have the same sending and receiving rights. The SICAM eRTU is assigned "its own" control center channel in the control center. Transmission commands in the control direction are performed spontaneously as required. In monitoring direction the process data is transmitted in cyclic, spontaneous and scanned mode. The function of control and monitoring directions is monitored via acknowledgment or check telegrams.
"Central station" function Sender Receiver Transtoring direction Transmission path
Control direction
Receiver
Sender
"Substation" function
suc212.wmf
Fig. 11-3 Data exchange in balanced transmission mode
190
Asymmetric transmission procedure

(Unbalanced Mode, multi-point transmission)
In this mode, the control center (master) takes the initiative in the data exchange. The SICAM eRTU (slave) only sends data when requested to do so by the control center. The asymmetric transmission procedure permits the control center to use one sender and one receiver to control several SICAM eRTUs and to receive their process information. The individual SICAM eRTUs are addressed by station number. Depending on the protocol used, different scan procedures are used:
q q
With the SINAUT 8-FW, this is Quick-Check / Quick-Scan and lowerlevel requests for scanning lists. In IEC 60870-5-101, all stations are scanned for class 1 and/or class 2 data. The SICAM eRTU only recognizes class 1 data. A scan for class 2 data is always answered with a negative acknowledgment. However, the answer telegram contains a reference to available class 1 data (spontaneous events or scanned information) where such data exists (ACD bit).
"Central station" function
Control Center
Sender Receiver
Transmission path
Receiver
Sender
Receiver
Sender
Receiver
Sender
SICAM eRTU 1
SICAM eRTU 2
SICAM eRTU n
suc213.wmf
Fig. 11-4 Data exchange in unbalanced transmission mode
11.1.3 Types of Transmission (Operating Modes)

The following Chapter 11.1.4 to Chapter 11.1.6 describe the protocoloverlapping functions of the transmission types. The following are available in the SICAM eRTU:
q q q
Transmission lists as shown in Table 11-1 16 priorities Information addresses (telegram numbers) that can be assigned to any transmission list. The assignment of information addresses is static; it is performed when the system is parameterized.
191
List structure
The figure below shows the structure of the lists available in the SICAM eRTU.
Basic cycle list Periodic List Time- / countercontrolled lists
Prio: 14 Prio: 9 ... 13
Triggered continuously by MCP Triggered by counter based on the number of telegrams of the basic cycle sent Triggered by system clock or counter (number of telegrams sent) Triggered by command from the central office Triggered by FM for spontaneous process event Triggered spontaneously by CPU
Prio: 15 1...8 *)
Scanned lists
Spontaneous lists
Telegram image
Prio: Telegram Buffer 9 ... 13 Organizational List Prio: System events 1 ... 8
*) with increased priority

suc214.wmf
Fig. 11-5 List structure in the SICAM eRTU system

q q
Basic cycle Continuous transmission of information Periodic list Transmission of a parameterizable number of telegrams at the end of the basic cycle Time-controlled lists Transmission after a parameterized span of time has elapsed. Counter-controlled lists Transmission after expiration of a parameterizable telegram counter Requested lists Transmission is controlled by the operator, e.g. via a scan command. The scanned lists are transmitted once. Spontaneous lists Transmission after occurrence of the spontaneous event Organizational list Transmission e.g. when operational or system events occur (status indications).
The basic cycle is interrupted for transmission of the following:

q q q
q q
192
Number of lists
The number of lists available depends on the telegram structure. The following table shows the possible lists:
Table 11-1
Number of parameterizable lists in the SICAM eRTU system Number of possible lists in the List SINAUT 8-FW telegram structure IEC 60870-5-101 telegram structure
Cyclic lists
Basic Cycle Subordinate basic cycle

(periodic list)
1 1
1 1
Time-controlled lists or
counter-controlled lists
8 Can be switched on/off
Scanned lists
Group scanned lists

Spontaneous lists
8 1)
22 2)
Telegram image procedure Telegram storage procedure

with time 16 16
Telegram storage procedure

without time
Trigger lists
Organization list
Telegram storage procedure

for organizational telegrams 3)
1)
Group scanned list 1 contains the general check ) The possible lists are divided into 1 general check list 16 groups 1 all metered values 4 groups for metered-valued scan 3)The organizational telegram storage list is generated permanently by the system with the highest priority.
193
11.1.4 Spontaneous Operating Modes

When symmetric transmission mode is used, a transmission in spontaneous operating mode only takes place when a spontaneous event is currently available. The user can parameterize individually which event triggers a transmission. Listed below are some examples of causes of spontaneous transmission in the control direction:
q q
Commands Scheduled values
Listed below are some examples of causes of spontaneous transmission in the monitoring direction:
q q q q q
Changes in the state of indications Measured values that exceeded their threshold Counter value freeze Operational and system events (e.g. command not executed) Changes in information status (e.g. overflow, not current)
The following spontaneous transmission modes are available: Telegram image mode
(trigger mode)
In the telegram image mode, the spontaneous process change (indications, measured values, etc.) is entered into the transmission image, and the trigger for spontaneous transmission is set. To increase transmission efficiency, information from a consecutive address area is transmitted in blocks. In the case of rapid changes and slow transmission links, however, the transmission image may be overwritten by a more recent change of the information. The telegram image mode ensures that the process image of the station is quickly transmitted to the control center, even if the transmission link is slow. For transmission in the telegram image mode, parameterizable trigger lists with individual transmission priorities are available (see Figure11-5). Telegrams of this type of list are transferred spontaneously without time stamp.
194
Telegram buffer mode
This procedure is used to acquire all process changes and store them temporarily in a cyclic telegram buffer until they can be transferred. The process changes transferred spontaneously by the function modules are sorted by the MCP in the order in which they occurred according to their time stamp. They are entered in the telegram buffer and sent spontaneously with or without time. The following telegram buffers exist:
q q q
Telegram buffer with time Telegram buffer without time Telegram buffer for organizational telegrams
Telegram buffer with time

(transmission with real time)
Spontaneous process changes (indications, measured values, etc.) are transmitted in real time according to the FIFO principle (first-in-first-out). This requires that the telegram address be assigned to a spontaneous list "telegram buffer with time". The time information in the telegram is derived from the time stamp supplied by the function modules. The MCP converts this time stamp of the time of acquisition on the process input to a time format specific for telegrams.
Telegram buffer without time

(transmission in correct order)
Spontaneous process changes (indications, measured values) are transmitted without time according to the FIFO principle (first-in-first-out). This requires that the telegram address be assigned to a spontaneous list "telegram buffer without time". For the transmission of organization blocks, a dedicated telegram buffer is provided. The organizational telegram buffer list has the priority 0 permanently assigned. This means that all state changes are transmitted with the highest priority and in correct chronological order. Double transmission can be used for indications. This requires that the indication be parameterized both in a spontaneous list with the telegram image procedure and in a spontaneous list with the telegram storage procedure (usually telegram storage with time). This permits information on a change in state to be sent quickly to the control center although the transmission paths are slow while real time information is then sent with a parameterizable priority.
Telegram buffer for organizational telegrams Spontaneous double transmission
195
11.1.5 Scanned Transmission Modes

Organizational processes (e.g. change of shifts) or events (e.g. malfunctions) may make it necessary to scan part or all of the process information from the control center at a specific point in time. The SICAM eRTU offers for that purpose lists to which indications, measured values, metered values and system messages can be freely assigned. The assignment of information addresses to the lists is static; it is performed when the system is parameterized. The lists can also be used in polling systems. The lists are scanned by the control center at predefined intervals and thus update the image. Group scan A specific group of information (must be combined in a group scan list) can be scanned by the control center with a group scan command. Each time a list is triggered, the number of telegrams that can be configured for that list is transmitted. If several groups are requested, they are transmitted in the order of their priority. One group is reserved for the general interrogation (GI). The general interrogation list usually contains all non-cyclic telegrams. If a GI is triggered while another is already in progress, the GI is aborted and restarted.
196
11.1.6 Cyclic Operating Modes

The operating mode "cyclic" can be used for data transmission without a check for change by the eRTU. This ensures a continuous update of the process image in the control center. Cyclic data transmission is primarily used with dedicated lines and requires a full-duplex modem, i.e. a separate transmission channel for the control direction and a separate transmission channel for the monitoring direction). The following types of cyclic transmission modes are available:
q q q
Basic Cycle Subordinate cycle Time-/counter-controlled list
Basic cycle with increased priority
The basic cycle is intended for the continuous transmission of information from the eRTU image. The telegrams are transmitted in ascending order of their address in the basic cycle list. The basic cycle list exists only once in the SICAM eRTU. It has the lowest transmission priority. When many telegrams from higher-priority lists (e.g. spontaneous or group scan telegrams) are transferred, there is a danger of process value update checks being triggered in the control center. To prevent this, a dynamic increase in priority can be parameterized for the basic cycle list. All directly consecutive telegrams which are not sent from the basic cycle or the periodic list are counted. When the parameterizable number of telegrams is reached, the priority of the basic cycle is increased to high priority. After the one-time transmission of the basic cycle, the priority returns to normal.
Subordinate basic cycle

(periodic list)
The periodic list is subordinate to the basic cycle. This list exists only once in the eRTU. After the complete basic cycle list has been transferred, a parameterizable number of telegrams from the periodic list is faded in between two basic cycles. This requires that priority of the periodic list be higher than that of the basic cycle. Measured values whose change is very slow are usually transferred with the periodic list.
197
Time-controlled list
The time-controlled list is transferred at the end of the parameterized cycle time. Each time it is triggered, a configurable number of telegrams from the list is transmitted. The telegrams are transmitted in ascending order of their address. The time-controlled operating mode can be switched on/off by the control center. List-specific parameters allow to choose between different types of timecontrolled mode:
Number = 1; time > Block cycle with parameterizable pause between 0 telegrams Number = 1; time = Basic cycle without pauses between telegrams which 0 can be switched on/off Number > 1; time > Block cycle with parameterizable pause between 0 telegrams
The time-controlled operating mode can be used to implement the "creeping process data update (GI)" function by transferring a telegram from the total transmission image to the control center every 5 seconds, for example. The time interval can be parameterized from 0 to 6000 seconds (i.e. 100 minutes) in 100-ms increments. Counter-controlled list The counter-controlled list is transferred when a parameterized number of telegrams has been sent. All telegrams are counted which are not sent from the counter-controlled list itself. Each time this list is triggered, the number of telegrams configured for this list is transferred from the list. The telegrams are transmitted in ascending order of their address. The counter-controlled operating mode can be switched on/off by the control center. The telegram counter can be parameterized with 0 to 255 telegrams. Full cyclic mode
(only for SINAUT 8FW telegram structure)
During full cyclic operation, all telegrams parameterized in the SICAM eRTU are sent to the control center regardless of allocation to transmission lists. Full cyclic mode generally occurs after startup and when the error indication "control direction malfunction" is detected.
198
11.1.7 Telecontrol Protocols

The following can be specified by selection of the telecontrol protocol:
q q
The structure of the data records (i.e. telegram structure) The representation of the information during transmission (i.e. type of modulation)
The following telecontrol data transmission protocols are available on the SICAM eRTU system q IEC 60870-5-101
q q
Pulse code modulation (PCM) Format class FT1.2 (corresponds to protection with Hamming distance d = 4) Pulse code modulation (PCM), Network link via PPP / RS232 Secure data transmission with TCP/IP Digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM) Protection with Hamming distance d = 2, d = 4 or d = 6 Pulse code modulation (PCM) Format class FT1.2 (corresponds to protection with Hamming distance d = 4) Pulse code modulation (PCM) Format class FT3 (corresponds to protection with Hamming distance d=6) Pulse code modulation (PCM) Format class FT1.2 (corresponds to protection with Hamming distance d = 4) Pulse code modulation (PCM) Format class FT1.2 (corresponds to protection with Hamming distance d = 4)
IEC 60870-5-104
q q
SINAUT 8-FW
q q
DNP V3.00
q q
TELEGYR 800
q q
TELEGYR 8979
q q
199
Protocol combinations
Maximally two different telecontrol protocols per MCP can be combined for ensuring the communication of the SICAM eRTU with higher-level control centers. Different protocols to higher-level control centers can be used for the connection of a substation (via the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol). The table below includes a list of the possible protocol combinations.
Table 11-2
Possible protocol combinations Protocol combinations to substations / units IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation), IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
Protocol combinations to control centers SINAUT 8-FW, IEC 60870-5-101 DNP V3.00, IEC 60870-5-101 DNP V3.00, SINAUT 8-FW TELEGYR 800, IEC 60870-5-101 TELEGYR 800, SINAUT 8-FW TELEGYR 800, DNP V3.00 SINAUT 8-FW DNP V3.00 TELEGYR 800 TELEGYR 8979 IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-104
200
11.2 Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram

11.2.1 Communication Principle
The IEC 60870-5-101 telegram structure is pulse code modulated (Chapter 11.1.1) and is based on the ISO-OSI layer model for open systems as specified in IEC 60870-5-3 section 4. To achieve very short reaction times, this telegram uses three of the seven layers:
q q q
Physical layer Link layer Application layer
Physical layer
The physical layer handles the following tasks:

q q q q q q q q
Conversion of the signal to the interface level Galvanic isolation (2.5kV) Monitoring of the signal quality Bit and telegram synchronization Conversion from parallel to serial telegram presentation Adding and removing telegram delimiters (start / end characters) Detection of telegram format errors Protecting telegrams against loss and errors by creating and checking check codes Format class FT1.2 is fulfilled (equivalent to Hamming distance d = 4) and is, thus, compliant with integrity class I2.
Connect the lines to the control centers at the two 25-pole ports X1/X2 on the front of the MCP. X1 and X2 can be parameterized as
q
V.24/V.28 interface - asynchronous The possible transmission speed is between 50 bits/s and 115.200 bits/s and depends on the external conditions. RS422 interface - asynchronous The possible transmission speed is between 50 bits/s and 115.200 bits/s and depends on the external conditions.
201
RS485 interface- asynchronous The possible transmission speed is between 50 bits/s and 115.200 bits/s and depends on the external conditions. X.21 interface - synchronous The transmission speed is determined by an external cycle and lies between 600 bits/s and 64 kbits/s.
Data link layer (incl. transport layer)
The data link layer controls the transmission procedure. Its main tasks are:
q q
Performing the basic services in balanced and unbalanced transmission (e.g. Request / Respond, Send / Confirm). Adding the control fields in telegrams with mode-specific information.
Application layer
Identification and handling of telegram information occurs in the application layer. Its main tasks are:
q q q q
Variable structure recognition Splitting of information blocks Image management and transmission mode control Command management
Representation
Each data byte of the IEC 60870-5-T101 telegram is supplemented with a start, parity and stop character. The following figure shows those characters that are transmitted and those that are shown in telegram images.
Bit sequence on the line
11. 10. 9. 8.
64
7.
32
6.
16
5. 23
8
4. 22
4
3. 21
2
2.
1
1. Bit
Stop Parity 27 bit bit 128
26
1
25
1
24
0
20 Start
bit
Start character (=68hex) User information
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte n-2
Check sum character

for entire telegram End character (= 16hex)
1 1
x 1 0 0 0
Check sum
1 0 1 1 0
0 0
Byte n-1 Byte n
Characters represented in telegram screens Transmitted characters

suc215.wmf
Fig. 11-6 Representation of IEC 60870-5-101 telegrams
202
Rules of transmission
Transmission is subject to 6 rules: Rule 1 Rule 2 Rule 3 Rule 4 Rule 5 In quiescent state 1 signal is present on the line. A character consists of a start bit, 8 information bits, an even parity bit and a stop bit. No quiescent states are permissible between the characters of a telegram. The user data are finished by an 8-bit checksum (CS). The checksum is the sum of all user data without carry. The receiver checks the characters for start bit, stop bit and an even parity bit. The telegram is checked for the start character, the telegram checksum, the end character and the minimum interval between two telegrams. If an error is found during one of the checks, the telegram is rejected, otherwise it must be released for further processing. Between the telegrams a minimum interval of 33 bits quiescent state is necessary, so that in case of an error as per Rule 5 the receiver can be synchronized.
Rule 6
11.2.2 Telegram Layout

Three types of telegrams are used in IEC 60870-5-101 telegrams.
q q q
Telegrams with variable length Telegrams with fixed length Single Characters
The following figure shows the different telegram structures.
203
Telegram with variable length

Start char. = 68hex Block length Block length Start char. = 68hex Control field Address field Telegram ID Var. struct. recognition Cause of transmission Station address User area 3) Header Protection
Telegram with fixed length 1)

Start char. = 10hex Control field Address field Check sum End char. = 16hex "short record" 1) also called 2) Header security 3) Header data link control 2) 3) Appendix Protection
Single characters
Single char. = E5hex
Information address
Information object Check sum End char. = 16hex Appendix Protection

suc216a.wmf
Fig. 11-7 Layout of IEC 60870-5-101 telegrams in the SICAM eRTU system
Start / end character
The start and end characters delimit the telegram and are part of the telegram protection. In addition, the start character identifies the telegram: Start character = 68 hex:Telegram with variable length (long block) Start character = 10 hex:Telegram with fixed length (short block) Start character = E5 hex:Single character
Block length
The block length field in the header of variable-length telegrams contains the number of bytes of the user data area plus the link control header. The value can be up to 255. Six bytes (4 bytes in the security header and 1 byte each for the check sum and end character) are added to the contents of the block length field to obtain the telegram length. The second block length field repeats the value of the first and is used by the link layer for checking the telegram.
204
11.2.3 Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram

The link control header in the telegram consists of the following fields:
q q
Control field Address field
Control field
The control field contains information on the direction and type of telegrams as well as control information to prevent loss or duplication of telegrams. Its data content differs in asymmetric and in symmetric transmission mode: q Control field in asymmetric transmission (unbalanced mode)
MSB LSB
FCB FCV Control field RES PRM for asymmetric transmission 0

Bit 27 26 25 24
20
Primary to secondary station Secondary to primary station
ACD DFC
23
Function
22 21 20
The primary station is always the station that caused the transmission of the message. The secondary station is always the station that responds to the message. Explanation of the field contents: Function Type of telegram (e.g., user data, interrogation or acknowledgment). The meaning of the code is different for each direction of transmission. See chapter 5.1.2 of the IEC 60870-5-2 standard for a detailed explanation of the code. Frame Count Bit valid: Informs on the validity of the telegram (frame) count bit FCB. The Frame Count Bit is used to prevent loss or multiplication of messages: the primary station inverts FCB at each new send/confirm or request/respond service directed at the same SICAM eRTU. If an expected response is invalid, or a timeout has occurred, the last service is repeated with the same FCB. Data Flow Control: The secondary station notifies the initiating primary station that immediately following messages may cause a buffer overflow. Access Demand: The secondary station notifies the primary station that high-priority event (class 1 data) are ready for transmission. The primary station can now request these data with priority.
FCV FCB
DFC
ACD
205
PRM RES q
Primary Message: This bit is set in messages from the initiating primary station. In reserve (not used).
Control field for symmetric transmission (balanced mode)

MSB LSB
1
Control field for symmetric transmission: Bit
DIR PRM 0
27 26
FCB FCV RES DFC

25 24
20
Function
23 22 21 20
The primary station is always the station that causes the transmission of the message. The secondary station is always the station that responds to the message. Explanation of the field contents: Function Type of telegram (e.g. user data, with/without response, acknowledgment). The meaning of the code is different for each direction of transmission. See chapter 6.1.2 of the IEC 60870-5-2 standard for a detailed explanation of the code. as in asymmetric transmission as in asymmetric transmission as in asymmetric transmission Reserve (not used) Primary Message: This bit is set in messages from the initiating primary station. Physical transmission direction: "1" for message from the control center to the SICAM eRTU; "0" for messages from the SICAM eRTU to the control center
FCV FCB DFC RES PRM DIR
206
Address field
The address field contains the data link address. This address constitutes the target address in telegrams from the primary station (initiating station), and the source address in telegrams from the secondary station (receiving station).
MSB Address field Bit LSB
27
27
26
26
25
25
24
24
23
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
The address in telegrams to all stations (broadcast) is the highest possible address (255 or 65535). The length of the address field can be parameterized: 0, 1 or 2 bytes.
11.2.4 User Area in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram

The user data area in the telegram consists of:
q q q q q q
Telegram ID Variable structure ID Cause of transmission Station address Information address Information object
Type ID
This field defines structure, type and format of the following information object. For example, information objects are marked with or without time by various type identifiers.
MSB Telegram ID Bit LSB
27
27
26
26
25
25
24
24
23
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
In the SICAM eRTU system, values between 1 and 127 are defined in monitoring and in control direction in accordance with the following table:
Table 11-3 Type ID Telegram objects for process information in monitoring direction Type of information object Length of the Information Object (in Bytes) 1 4
1 2
Single-point indication Single-point indication with time stamp
207
Table 11-3 Type ID
Telegram objects for process information in monitoring direction Type of information object Length of the Information Object (in Bytes) 1 4 2 5 5 8 3 6
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Double-point indication Double-point indication with time stamp Tap position indication Tap position indication with time stamp Bit pattern, 32-bit Bit pattern with time stamp Measured value, normalized value Measured value, normalized value with time stamp CP24Time2a Measured value, scaled value Measured value, scaled value with time stamp CP24Time2a Measured value, short floating point number Measured value, shortened floating point number with time stamp CP24Time2a Counter values Metered values with time stamp CP24Time2a Event from protection device with time stamp CP24Time2a (not with substation connection) Blocked pick-up of protection device with time stamp CP24Time2a (not with substation connection)
11 12
3 6
13 14
5 8
15 16
5 8
17
18
208
Table 11-3 Type ID
Telegram objects for process information in monitoring direction Type of information object Length of the Information Object (in Bytes) 7
19
Blocked tripping of protection device with time stamp CP24Time2a (not with substation connection) Single-point indication with time stamp CP56Time2a Double-point indication with time stamp CP56Time2a Tap position indication with time stamp CP56Time2a Bit pattern with 32 Bit with time stamp CP56Time2a Measured value, normalized value with time stamp CP56Time2a Measured value, scaled value with time stamp CP56Time2a Measured value, shortened floating point number with time stamp CP56Time2a Metered values with time stamp CP56Time2a Event from protection device with time stamp CP56Time2a (not with substation connection) Blocked tripping of protection device with time stamp CP56Time2a (not with substation connection) Blocked trippings of protection device with time stamp CP56Time2a (not with substation connection)
30
31
32
33
12
34
10
35
10
36
12
37
12
38
10
39
11
40
11
209
Table 11-4 Type ID
Telegram objects for process information in control direction Type of information object Length of the information object (in Bytes) 1 1 1 3
45 46 47 48
Single command Double command Transformer tap command Analog set-point control command, normalized value Digital set-point control command, 32 Bit
51
Table 11-5 Type ID
Telegram objects for system information in monitoring direction Type of information object Length of the information object (in Bytes) 1
70
End of initialization, always used
Table 11-6 Type ID
Telegram objects for system information in control direction Type of information object Length of the information object (in Bytes) 1 1 7 2 1
100 101 103 104 105
(General) scan command Counter scan command Clock synchronization command Check command Process reset command
210
Table 11-7 Type ID
Telegram objects for parameter in control direction Type of information object Length of the information object (in Bytes) 3
110
Parameter for measured value, normalized value Parameter for measured value, scaled value Parameter for measured value, shortened floating point number
111 112
3 5
Variable structure identifier
The "Variable structure identifier" field defines the type of addressing and the number of information elements.
MSB Variable structure identifier Bit LSB
SQ
2
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
20
Number
6 5 4
23
22
21
Explanation of the field contents: Number SQ Number of subsequent information elements Specifies the type of addressing: "0" Individual addressing of a single element or each element of a combination "1" Only one address for a sequence of information elements, with the specified address addressing the first item of information, and the following information elements being "address + 1".
211
Cause of transmission
The content of this field specifies the further processing of the information and controls its forwarding to the user program.
MSB Cause of transmission Bit LSB
T
27
P/N
26
25
25
24
24
23
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
Cause
Explanation of the field contents: Cause P/N Identifier of the cause of transmission, see Chapter 11-8 Confirmation pos./ neg.: The bit shows the positive or negative confirmation of a job that was initiated by a user function. Test bit: Identifies messages that are created during test operation. It is used to allow testing of the transmission and the devices without influencing the process.
Table 11-8 Value 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 20
Causes of transmission in the SICAM eRTU system Cause of transmission Cyclic - basic cycle, time and counter controlled transmission Spontaneous Initialized Activation (used e.g. in control direction for commands) Confirmation of activation (monitoring direction) Cancellation of activation Confirmation of cancellation of activation Conclusion of the activation Feedback, caused by remote command (control center) Feedback, caused by local command Response to general interrogation
212
Table 11-8 Value 21...36 37 38 39 40 41
Causes of transmission in the SICAM eRTU system Cause of transmission Response to group scan 1...16 Response to general metered value request Response to scan of metered value group 1 Response to scan of metered value group 2 Response to scan of metered value group 3 Response to scan of metered value group 4
Station address
The station address is the same for all information elements of a telegram.
MSB Station address Bit LSB
27 215
27
26 214
26
25 213
25
24 212
24
23 211
23
22 210
22
21 29
21
20 28
20
Less significant byte Most significant byte
The respective addresses 255 and 65535 have the meaning "to all stations" (global address). The length of the station address can be parameterized: 1 or 2 bytes.
213
Information address
In the SICAM eRTU system, the information address can contain up to three bytes. The third byte is only used in structured addressing to define a specific address pattern within a station.
MSB LSB
27
Information address
26 214 222
26
25 213 221
25
24 212 220
24
23 211 219
23
22 210 218
22
21 29 217
21
20 28 216
20
Less significant byte
215 223
Bit 27
Most significant byte
The length of the information address can be parameterized: 1 to 3 bytes. Information object Layout and content of the information object depend on the information type defined in the "Type identifier" field (see Chapter 11-3to Table 11-7. The information object contains
q q q
the information the information status the time assigned to the information (optional)
The complete information objects are described in IEC 60870-5-101. The following four examples show the layout of the information object for
q q q q
Double-point indication with relative time (3 bytes) Double-point indication with absolute time (7 Byte) Normalized measured value Double command
214
Information object of a double-point indication with relative time (3 bytes)

MSB Information LSB
IV 27
NT 26 214
SB 25 213 25
25
BL RES RES 24 212 24

24
21 21 29 21
21
20 20 28 20
20
DPI
Less significant byte More significant byte
23 211 23
23
22 210 22
22
Time value
Milliseconds 215 Milliseconds IV RES

Bit 27 26
Minutes
Explanation of the field contents: DPI RES BL Double-point indication Reserve (not used) Blocked / not blocked: The value of the information object is blocked for transmission. Blocking and unblocking can be performed by an on-site controller, for example. Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by an operate or automatically. Not topical / topical: A value is topical if the latest update was successful. Invalid / valid: A value is valid if it was correctly acquired by the acquire function. Value: 0 ... 59 999 ms (includes seconds) Value: 0 ... 59 min
SB NT IV Milliseconds Minutes
215
Information object of a double-point indication with absolute time (7 bytes)

MSB Information LSB
IV 27 215
NT 26 214
SB 25 213 25
BL RES RES 24 212 24 24 24 23 211 23 23 23 23 24

2
4
21 21 29 21 21 21 21 21
2
1
20 20 28
0..59 999 ms
DPI
22 210 22 22 Hours 22 22 22
2
2
Milliseconds Milliseconds
Time value
IV RES SU 22
20
0..59 min
Minutes 20
RES 21 20
0..23 hours
20 20
1..31 days 1..7 days
Day of the week RES RES

Bit 2
7
Day of month Months 23 Years

2
3
1..12 months
26
2
6
25
2
5
20
0..99 years 2
0
Explanation of the field contents: DPI BL Double-point indication Blocked / not blocked: The value of the information object is blocked for transmission. Blocking and unblocking can be performed by an on-site controller, for example. Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by an operate or automatically. Not topical / topical: A value is topical if the latest update was successful. Invalid / valid: The value is valid if it was correctly acquired by the acquire function. <0>: valid <1>: invalid Reserve (not used) <0>: <1>: standard time daylight-saving time
SB NT IV
RES SU
216
Information object for a normalized measured value

MSB LSB
27
Measured value
26 214
25 213
24 212
23 211
22 210
21 29
20 28
Measured value 215 VZ Measured value NT

26
Status Bit
IV
27
SB
25
BL RES RES RES OV

24 23 22 21 20
Explanation of the field contents: Measured value S OV RES BL Normalized measured value Sign: Negative measured values are transmitted as a twos complement. No overflow / overflow: The value of the information object is outside a predefined value range. Reserve (not used) Blocked / not blocked: The value of the information object is blocked for transmission. Blocking and unblocking can be performed by an on-site controller, for example. Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by an operate or automatically. Not topical / topical: A value is topical if the latest update was successful. Invalid / valid: A value is valid if it was correctly acquired by the acquire function.
SB NT IV
217
Information object of a double command

MSB Information and status Bit S/B 27 LSB
24
26
23
25
22
QU 24
21
23
20
22
21
21
20
20
DCS
Explanation of the field contents: DCS Double Command State: <0>: not permissible (fault position) <1>: OFF position <2>: ON position <3>: not permissible (fault position) QU Command qualifier: <0>: Free time qualifier <1>: Short command output time (e.g. for circuit breakers) <2>: Long command output time (e.g. for isolator control) <3>: Persistent command <4>...<15>: <16>...<32>: Not assigned Command output times permanently parameterized for all commands of a SICAM eRTU
S/E
Select / Execute: <0>: Information is output immediately <1>: Command is activated by separate instruction
11.2.5 Transmission Procedures of the IEC 60870-5-T101 Telegram Structure

The functions for communication with the control center are handled by defined transmission procedures. Two important procedures are described below in an exemplary way:
q q
Startup of the SICAM eRTU Basic services: Send, Send / Confirm and Request / Respond
See standard IEC 60870-5-2 for a detailed description of the procedures.
218
Startup procedure of the SICAM eRTU
After a restart of the SICAM eRTU during running operation (e.g., switching the SICAM eRTU on for commissioning/service work), the link to the control center must be reestablished. The procedure for this is shown in the following figure. Control Center
(e.g. command,Order to eRTU GI, scan) Time monitoring triggered repetitions
SICAM eRTU
Startup of eRTU No response: Link layer is not available, is reset or switched off (e.g. switch on)
End of startup: Channel is available
Startup of the eRTU is recognized: Triggering synchronization of data link layer
Link initialization: Status message to control center
ACK
Control center is synchronized
Normalize data link layer and acknowledge (Next sequential telegram bit = "1" expected)
Scan status of data link layer Status of data link layer is reported Triggering synchronization of data link layer Normalize data link layer and acknowledge eRTU synchronized
eRTU is available after startup. Following functions: - General interrogation - Clock synchronization - Repetition of job
eRTU reports end of initialization
suc217.wmf
Fig. 11-8 Startup procedure in symmetric mode
Cycle monitoring or an unconfirmed job tells the control center that the link to the SICAM eRTU has broken down. After a defined number of repetitions, the control center tries in defined intervals to re-establish the link by repeatedly transmitting the "Scan of the state of the link layer". If the link to the SICAM eRTU becomes available again, the SICAM eRTU responds with the status of the data link layer. The control center and the SICAM eRTU now synchronize their links. After startup of the SICAM eRTU and the data link layer has been synchronized, the SICAM eRTU reports "end of initialization".
219
Basic services in symmetric mode
In symmetric transmission mode, one dedicated transmission channel each is provided in monitoring and in control direction. Telegrams are transmitted directly on these channels depending on their priority. For this direct transmission there are basic services, three of which are illustrated in the following figure: Primary station Send / without confirmation
Data acquisition Sending Receive Further processing
Secondary station
Send / confirmation
Data acquisition Sending Receive Acknowl. Further processing
Request / respond
Application Scan Receive Response Further processing Process feedback
Further processing
Receive
suc218.wmf
Fig. 11-9 Basic routines for data communication using the IEC 60870-5-T101 telegram structure
220
In monitoring direction the SICAM eRTU can use:

q
Send / no confirmation Used to transmit cyclic telegrams. A confirmation is not necessary because a corrupted telegram is contained again in the next cycle. Send / Confirm Provided for transmission of all spontaneous and organizational telegrams. The SICAM eRTU keeps each block in the telegram buffer until an acknowledge message (usually a single character) confirms that it has been correctly received. In control direction the control center can use: Send / no confirmation Provided for cyclic transmission of setpoint Send / Confirm Provided for the transmission of all commands and organizational telegrams to the SICAM eRTU. The SICAM eRTU confirms (usually with a single character). Request / respond This procedure can be used to scan lists in the SICAM eRTU. The SICAM eRTU replies to a scan command by transmitting the telegrams contained in the scanned list.
q q
221
11.2.6 Safety functions

Timeout for acknowledgments A telegram that is transmitted by a primary station and must be confirmed by the partner (secondary station) is repeated after a settable interval if the confirmation telegram has not been received by then (timeout). The time monitoring begins when the primary telegram is sent and the send pause (33 characters) has expired. The time interval for the timeout depends on the reaction time of the remote station and the maximum transmission time for the response telegram (short record or single character). The number of transmission attempts in case of a timeout can be parameterized: a parameter value 2, for instance, means that a first telegram is repeated once if no response is received. Failing a response to this second attempt, the station signals a pulse error and switches to cyclic scan of the link layer state. Channel monitoring The transmission channel is monitored by the send/confirm procedure. There may, however, be pauses during which no telegrams or only telegrams in Send / no reply mode are transmitted. To ensure continuous monitoring of the channels, a channel monitoring time can be parameterized. The monitoring time is started each time a confirm message is received from the partner. If no telegrams have been sent up to the expiration of this monitoring time, a test record is sent to the remote station. Failing a timely acknowledgment to this check block, and of a parameterized number of repeated check blocks, the station signals a check block error and a pulse error. When the remote station responds again, its data link layer is reset and normalized again (see Figure 11-8). After successful synchronization, the check block error and the pulse error signal are canceled. Status scan When a channel malfunction or a buffer overflow has occurred because a remote station (DFC) has sent too many telegrams in too short a time, a status scan is sent cyclically to the partner. If the check command is activated, the SICAM eRTU acknowledges with a short block the check command that is cyclically transmitted by the control center. The control center monitors the arrival of this acknowledgment with a check command cycle time. As a rule, the check command is only used in balanced transmission mode.
Check command
222

The IEC 60870-5-104 telegram is pulse-code modulated and is based on the ISO-OSI-layer model for open systems, 5 layers however are sufficient:
q q q q q
Physical layer (layer 1) PPP layer (layer 2) Internet layer (layer 3) Transport layer (layer 4) Application layer (layer 7)
Physical layer
This physical layer handles the following tasks:

q q q q q
Conversion of the signal to the interface level Galvanic isolation (2.5kV) Monitoring of the signal quality Bit synchronisation Conversion from parallel to serial telegram presentation
Connect the lines to the control centers at the two 25-pole ports X1/X2 on the front of the MCP. X1 and X2 can be parameterized as
q
V.24/V.28 interface - asynchronous The possible transmission speed is between 50 bits/s and 115.200 bits/s and depends on the external conditions.
223
PPP layer
The PPP layer handles the following tasks:

q q q q q
Telegram synchronisation Adding and removing telegram delimiters (start / end characters) Detection of telegram format errors Protecting the telegrams against loss and failure by creating and checking check codes Masking / unmasking of control characters
Internet layer (IP) Transport layer (TCP)
The internet layer handles the networking of data packets in the network (routing). The transport layer takes on the end-to-end protection of the data exchange against:
q q q q
Failure of data packets Duplication of data packets Exchanging the order Data errors
Application layer
Identification and handling of telegram information occurs in the application layer. Its main tasks are:
q q q q
Variable structure recognition Splitting of information blocks Image management and transmission mode control Command management
224

Two telegram types are used as IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams:
q q
Telegram with user area Telegram without user area
Each telegram contains a control field with four bytes length. There are the following three control field variants:
q q q
Control field for information transmission with numbering (telegram with user area) Control field for monitoring with numbering (telegram without user area) Control field for test purposes without numbering (Telegram without user area)
The following picture shows the layout of the telegram types. Telegram with Application Area
Start char. = 68hex Block length Header Protection
Telegram without Application Area

Start char. = 68hex Block length Header Protection
Control field
Header Control field control
Control field
Header Control field control
Telegram ID Var. struct. recognition Transmission Cause of Station address User area Information address
Information object
suc216b.wmf
Fig. 11-10 Layout of IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams in the SICAM eRTU system
225
Start character
The start character always has the value 68 hex and is a component of the telegram protection. The block length box specifies the byte number of the user area plus the link control header (4 bytes). The value can be up to 253. If 2 bytes are added to the content of the block length field (security header), the telegram length results.
Block length
11.3.3 Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram

The link control header consists of the control field and has a length of 4 bytes. The three possible types of control fields are:
q q q
Control field for information transmission telegrams Control field for monitoring telegrams Control field for test telegrams
Control field Information transmission
A telegram for information transmission is defined in the control field by a 0 in octet 1, bt 0. Bit 1 to 7 of octet 1 and all bits of octet 2 contain the number of the transmission order. Bit 1 to 7 of octet 3 and all bits of octet 4 contain the number of the receive order.
MSB 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 LSB
Number of transmit order

214 Control field for information transmission 213 212 211 210 29 28
0
27
Octet 1
Number of transmit order

26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Octet 2
Number receive order

214 213 212 211 210 29 28
0
27
Octet 3

Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Octet 4
226
Control field Monitoring
A telegram for monitoring is defined by a 1 in octet 1, bit 0 and a 0in octet 1, bit 1. Bit 1 to 7 of octet 3 and all bits of octet 4 contain the number of the receive order.
MSB LSB
0 0
Control field for monitoring 26 25 24 23 22 21
Octet 1
Octet 2 20

214 213 212 211 210 29 28
0
27
Octet 3

Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Octet 4
227
Control field Test purposes
A telegram for test purposes is defined in the control field as follows. For each telegram only one each of the functions TESTFR, STOPDT or STARTDT may be used.
MSB 21 20 21 20 21 20 LSB
TESTFR
Control field for test purposes
STOPDT 0 0 0
STARTDT
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
Octet 4 23 22 21 20
Bit
27
26
25
24
Explanation of the field contents:

TESTFR (Test Frame) Specifies a test telegram used for checking the connection. A station sends a test telegram with TESTFR = act and the receiver station responds with TESTFR = con. 20 = <1> and 21 = <0>: TESTFR = act (active) 20 = <0> and 21 = <1>: TESTFR = con (confirmed) Specifies a telegram which starts a data transmission. A station sends a telegram with STARTDT = act and the receiver station responds with STARTDT = con. 20 = <1> and 21 = <0>: STARTDT = act (active) 20 = <0> and 21 = <1>: STARTDT = con (confirmed) Specifies a telegram which terminates a data transmission. A station sends a telegram with STOPDT = act and the receiver station responds with STOPDT = con. 20 = <1> and 21 = <0>: STOPDT = act (active) 20 = <0> and 21 = <1>: STOPDT = con (confirmed)
STARTDT (Start Data Transfer)
STOPDT (Stop Data Transfer)
228
11.3.4 User Area in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram

The user area in the telegram consists of
q q q q q q
Telegram ID Variable structure ID Cause of transmission Station address Information address Information object
Type ID
This field defines structure, type and format of the following information object. E.g., information objects with or without time are marked by different type IDs.
MSB Telegram ID Bit LSB
20
20
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
When the telegram IEC 60870-5-104 is used in monitoring and control direction, the following values are defined in the SICAM eRTU system:
Table 11-9 Type ID Telegram objects for process information in monitoring direction Type of information object Length of the information object (in bytes) 1 1 2 5 3 3 5 5 8
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 30
Single-point indication Double-point indication Tap position indication Bit pattern of 32 bit Measured value, normalized value Measured value, scaled value Measured value, short floating point number Metered values Single-point indication with time stamp CP56Time2a
229
Table 11-9 Type ID
Telegram objects for process information in monitoring direction Type of information object Length of the information object (in bytes) 8
31
Double-point indication with time stamp CP56Time2a Tap position indication with time stamp CP56Time2a Bit pattern with 32 bit with time stamp CP56Time2a Measured value, normalized value with time stamp CP56Time2a Measured value, scaled value with time stamp CP56Time2a Measured value, shortened floating point number with time stamp CP56Time2a Metered values with time stamp CP56Time2a Event from protection device with time stamp CP56Time2a Blocked pick-up of protection device with time stamp CP56Time2a Blocked trip of protection device with time stamp CP56Time2a
32
33
12
34
10
35
10
36
12
37
12
38
10
39
11
40
11
Table 11-10 Telegram objects for process information in control direction Type ID Type of information object Length of the information object (in bytes) 1 1 1
45 46 47
Single command Double command Transformer tap command
230
Table 11-10 Telegram objects for process information in control direction Type ID Type of information object Length of the information object (in bytes) 3
48
Analog set-point control command, normalized value Analog set-point control command, scaled value Analog set-point control command, shortened floating point number Digital set-point control command, 32 bit Single command with time stamp CP56Time2a Double command with time stamp CP56Time2a Tap position command with time stamp CP56Time2a Analog set-point control command, normalized value with time stamp CP56Time2a Analog set-point control command, scaled value with time stamp CP56Time2a Analog set-point control command, short floating point number with time stamp CP56Time2a Digital set-point control command, 32 bit with time stamp CP56Time2a
49
50
51 58
4 8
59
60
61
10
62
10
63
12
64
11
231
Table 11-11 Telegram objects for system information in monitoring direction Type ID Type of information object Length of the information object (in bytes) 1
70
End of initialization, always used
Table 11-12 Telegram objects for system information in control direction Type ID Type of information object Length of the information object (in bytes) 1 1 0
100 101 102
(General) scan command Counter scan command Read command (only address without information) Clock synchronization command Process reset command Test command with time stamp CP56Time2a
103 105 107
7 1 9
Table 11-13 Telegram objects for parameter in control direction Type ID Type of information object Length of the information object (in bytes) 3
110
Parameter for measured value, normalized value Parameter for measured value, scaled value Parameter for measured value, shortened floating point number
111 112
3 5
232
Variable structure identifier
The Variable structure identifier field defines the addressing type and the number of the information elements.
MSB Variable structure identifier Bit LSB
SQ
27
26
26
25
25
24
24
23 Number
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
Explanation of the field contents: Number SQ Number of subsequent information elements Specifies the type of addressing: "0" Individual addressing of a single element or each element of a combination "1" Only one address for a sequence of information elements, with the specified address addressing the first item of information, and the following information elements being "address + 1".
233
Cause of transmission
The content of this field specifies the further processing of the information and controls its forwarding to the user program.
MSB Cause of transmission Identifier of cause of transmission Bit LSB
T 27
27
P/N 26
26
25 25
25
24 24
24
23 23
23
22 22
22
21 21
21
20 20
20
Cause Identifier
Explanation of the field contents: Identifier used) Cause P/N Identifier of the cause of transmission (is zero if it is not Cause of transmission, see Chapter 11-14 Confirmation pos./ neg.: The bit shows the positive or negative confirmation of a job that was initiated by a user function. Test bit: Identifies messages that are created during test operation. It is used to allow testing of the transmission and the devices without influencing the process.
Table 11-14 Causes of transmission in the SICAM eRTU system Value 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cause of transmission Cyclic - basic cycle, time and counter controlled transmission Spontaneous Initialized Activation (used e.g. in control direction for commands) Confirmation of activation (monitoring direction) Cancellation of activation Confirmation of cancellation of activation Conclusion of the activation Feedback, caused by remote command (control center) Feedback, caused by local command
234
Table 11-14 Causes of transmission in the SICAM eRTU system Value 20 21...36 37 38 39 40 41 Cause of transmission Response to general interrogation Response to group scan 1...16 Response to general metered value request Response to scan of metered value group 1 Response to scan of metered value group 2 Response to scan of metered value group 3 Response to scan of metered value group 4
Station address
The station address is the same for all information elements of a telegram.
MSB Station address Bit LSB
27 215
27
26 214
26
25 213
25
24 212
24
23 211
23
22 210
22
21 29
21
20 28
20
Less significant byte Most significant byte
Address 65535 means "to all stations" (i.e., global address). The length of the station address must be set to 2 bytes in IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams.
235
Information address
MSB LSB
27
Information address
26 214 222
26
25 213 221
25
24 212 220
24
23 211 219
23
22 210 218
22
21 29 217
21
20 28 216
20
Less significant byte
215 223
Bit 27
Most significant byte
The length of the information address must be set to 3 bytes in IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams. Information object Layout and content of the information object depend on the information type defined in the "Type identifier" field (see Chapter 11-9to Table 11-132). The information object contains:
q q q
the information the information status the time assigned to the information (optional) Double-point indication without time (1 byte) Double-point indication with absolute time (7 byte) Normalized measured value Double command
The following four examples show the layout of the information object for
q q q q
236
Information object of a double-point indication without time (1 byte)

MSB Information Bit LSB
IV
27
NT
26
SB
25
BL RES RES
24 23 22
21
21
20
20
DPI
Explanation of the field contents: DPI RES BL Double-point indication Reserve (not used) Blocked / not blocked: The value of the information object is blocked for transmission. Blocking and unblocking can be performed by an on-site controller, for example. Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by an operator or automatically. Not topical / topical: A value is topical if the latest update was successful. Invalid / valid: A value is valid if it was correctly acquired by the acquire function.
SB NT IV
237
Information object of a double-point indication with absolute time (7 bytes)

MSB Information LSB
IV 27 215
NT 26 214
SB 25 213 25
BL RES RES 24 212 24 24 24 23 211 23 23 23 23 24

2
4
21 21 29 21 21 21 21 21
2
1
20 20 28
0..59 999 ms
DPI
22 210 22 22 Hours 22 22 22
2
2
Milliseconds Milliseconds
Time value
IV RES SU 22
20
0..59 min
Minutes 20
RES 21 20
0..23 hours
20 20
1..31 days 1..7 days
Day of the week RES RES

Bit 2
7
Day of month Months 23 Years

2
3
1..12 months
26
2
6
25
2
5
20
0..99 years 2
0
Explanation of the field contents: DPI BL Double-point indication Blocked / not blocked: The value of the information object is blocked for transmission. Blocking and unblocking can be performed by an on-site controller, for example. Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by an operator or automatically. Not topical / topical: A value is topical if the latest update was successful. Invalid / valid: The value is valid if it was correctly acquired by the acquire function. <0>: valid <1>: invalid Reserve (not used) <0>: <1>: standard time daylight-saving time
SB NT IV
RES SU
238
Information object for a normalized measured value

MSB LSB
2
Measured value
20 28
Measured value 215 VZ 214 213 212 211 210 29 Measured value NT
26
Status Bit
IV
27
SB
25
BL RES RES RES OV

24 23 22 21 20
Explanation of the field contents: Measured value Normalized measured value S OV RES BL Sign: Negative measured values are transmitted as a twos complement. No overflow / overflow: The value of the information object is outside a predefined value range. Reserve (not used) Blocked / not blocked: The value of the information object is blocked for transmission. Blocking and unblocking can be performed by an on-site controller, for example. Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by an operator or automatically. Not topical / topical: A value is topical if the latest update was successful. Invalid / valid: A value is valid if it was correctly acquired by the acquire function.
SB NT IV
239
Information object of a double command

MSB Information and status Bit S/B 27 LSB
24
26
23
25
22
QU 24
21
23
20
22
21
21
20
20
DCS
Explanation of the field contents: DCS Double Command State: <0>: not permissible (fault position) <1>: OFF position <2>: ON position <3>: not permissible (fault position) QU Command qualifier: <0>: Free time qualifier <1>: Short command output time (e.g. for circuit breakers) <2>: Long command output time (e.g. for isolator control) <3>: Persistent command <4>...<15>: <16>...<32>: Not assigned Command output times permanently parameterized for all commands of a SICAM eRTU
S/E
Select / Execute: <0>: Information is output immediately <1>: Command is activated by separate instruction
240
11.3.5 Differences to the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram

Mode For the IEC60870-5-104 telegram there is no difference between the symmetrical and asymmetrical transmission procedure. The transmission procedure corresponds to the symmetrical transmission procedure, although this term is not used. The data transmission is always released by the central station. Addressing Addressing on connection level is performed by the internet and transport layers. The protocol control information is covered by the APCI (Application Protocol Control Information). Telegram security Telegram protection against loss or reproduction is provided by the internet and transport layers. The only information objects used are those without time stamp or with absolute time stamp.
Time stamp
241
11.4 Control Center Link with the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram

The SINAUT 8-FW telegram structure is a bit-serial transmission procedure with an efficient data structure adapted to the process for increased safety and reliability of transmission paths subjected to interference. The SINAUT 8-FW telegram offers the following modulation procedures:
q q
Digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM) Pulse code modulation (PCM)
11.4.1 Pulse Duration Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram

The advantage of this type of modulation (see annex 11.1.1) is thanks to
q q q
monitoring of the telegram character duration synchronization of each character edge monitoring of the number of telegram characters
an increased safety. The telegram transmission speed is identical for control and monitoring directions and can be parameterized from 100 to 1200 bits/s.
242
Telegram Layout
A SINAUT 8-FW telegram consists of the following:

q q q
Address portion (see Chapter 11.4.2) Information portion (see Chapter 11.4.3) Telegram security
1. 1st character Address portion 24 or 32 characters Bit sequence on the line
SINAUT 8-FW telegram

Information portion 9,16, 36 oder 72 characters
d=2 0 PP IP d=4 0 0 d=6
Last character Security portion
PP: Supplement of pauselong characters to odd IP: Supplement of pulselong characters to odd
x9 +x7 + x5 + x3 +x2 +1 x16 + x14 +x11 + x10 +x9 + x7 + x5 +x3 +x +1

Linear, systematic security code (in acc. with Bose Chaudhuri)
Blank character
suc219.wmf
Fig. 11-11 Layout of a SINAUT 8-FW telegram (DPDM)
Telegram security
The security portion protects the entire telegram with a Hamming distance of d = 2, 4, or 6. The parameterizable security characters are transferred with the telegram. Figure 11-11 shows the number of security characters and their contents.
11.4.2 Address Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram

The address portion identifies the information contained in the telegram. It provides information on the source, destination and length of the telegram.
MSB 1st byte LSB
TGE 21 27 2
Bit 5
26 20 26 2
4
25 B 25 23
25
24 24 24 22
24
23 23 23 21
23
22 22 22 20
22
21 21 21 29
21
20 20 20 28
20
Station number TFK number
2nd byte
Data class
3rd byte
Telegram number (low) System number Record length

27 26
4th byte
Tel. no.
243

Station No. <0> for asymmetric transmission: Address "to all SICAM eRTUs" For symmetric transmission: Station address SICAM eRTU 0 <1>...<127> Binary coded for identification of SICAM eRTUs 1 to 127. When the symmetric transmission procedure (point-topoint communication) is used, the station number can be parameterized for sender and receiver on the SICAM eRTU. When the asymmetric transmission procedure is used, this parameterization is mandatory since it identifies the origin of the telegrams and is evaluated by the control center. Telegram group end (TGE) <1>Identifies the last telegram of a SICAM eRTU in the cycle during the asymmetric transmission procedure (i.e., polling). Telegram sequence identifier (TFK), binary-coded <0> TFK in telegrams of the control direction; Not permitted in monitoring direction <1>...<30> TFK for spontaneous and organizational telegrams from the SICAM eRTU to the control center <31> After startup, the SICAM eRTU transfers this TFK no. to tell the control center that the SICAM eRTU has started up. B Overflow of the TFK (e.g., control direction malfunction which prevents TFK acknowledgment) Data class <0> Organizational telegram <1> Spontaneous telegram <2> Cyclic telegram <3> Scanned telegram Telegram number, binary-coded <0>...<1023> Telegram numbers for identification of 1 byte of information each (i.e., maximum of 8192 information characters can be addressed per transmission direction and per SICAM eRTU) <0>...<7> Identifies the number of bytes in the information portion (see Chapter 11.4.3) Bit position 2 of the record length is used as the "compression bit". <0>...<7> Is used to expand the address area.
TGE
TFK No.
Data class
Telegram number
Record length
System No.
244
11.4.3 Information Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram

The information portion contains the actual process data and consists (for DPDM telegrams) of 9, 16, 62 or 72 characters of information depending on the type of telegram. Spontaneous information is usually scanned in short telegram types or cyclically transmitted in long telegram types. Eight digital process indications are combined in the SINAUT 8-FW telegram structure into one byte of information (i.e., indication byte). This byte is then identified by a common address (i.e., telegram number). This address is not bound to a certain area. It can be parameterized as desired. The following table shows the telegram structure for the types of information available. See the description of SINAUT telegram screens (E50400-U0055-U500-A1) for a complete presentation of all information portions.
Table 11-15 Formats available for SINAUT 8-FW telegrams in control direction Telegram type Telegram Designation SB 1 SB 1 SB 1 SB 1 SB 2 SB 5 SB 6 SB 7 Number of Single Elements 8 8 4 4 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Record length 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Addres s jump 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 4
Single command Single command with param. switching direction Double command Double command with param. switching direction 8-bit analog setpoint with sign 8-bit digital setpoint 16-bit digital setpoint 32-bit digital setpoint
245
Table 11-16 Formats available for SINAUT 8-FW telegrams in monitoring direction Telegram type Telegram Designation B1 B1 B2 B3 UB3 B4 B4 B5 B5 B6a B6b B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13a B13b B14 B15 B16 Number of Single Elements 4 2 1 8 4 32 16 64 32 8 8 1 4 8 2 4 32 8 8 4 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Record length 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Addres s jump 4 4 4 1 1 4 4 8 8 1 1 2 8 16 4 8 4 1 1 4 4 4
Bit pattern, 8 bits Bit pattern, 16 bits Bit pattern, 32 bits Single-point indication, 1 bytes Double-point indication, 1 bytes Single-point indication, 4 bytes Double-point indication, 4 bytes Single-point indication, 8 bytes Double-point indication, 8 bytes Indications, 1 byte real-time, resolution 10 ms Indications, 1 byte real-time, resolution 1 ms 1 measured value, 8 bits + sign 4 measured values, 8 bits + sign 8 measured values, 8 bits + sign 2 measured values, 11 bits + sign 4 measured values, 11 bits + sign Fleeting or short-time indication, 4 bytes Fleeting or short-time indication, real-time with 10 ms resolution Fleeting or short-time indication, real-time with 1 ms resolution 4 transformer taps, BCD or binary coded 1 metered value, BCD coded with 7 decades 1 metered value, binary coded with 28 bits
246
The following examples show the layout of the information portion for:
q q q
Indication type of telegram (4 bytes plus 1 byte with time) Measured value type of telegram (8 bits + sign and 11 bits + sign) Switching command type of telegram
Indication type of telegram
Two examples of this type of telegram are shown below.

q q
Information portion with 4 bytes Information portion with 1 byte and time
Information portion with 4 bytes
MSB Information
LSB
E8
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
Information E16 E15 E14 E13 E12 E11 E10 E9 Information E24 E23 E22 E21 E20 E19 E18 E17 Information E32 E31 E30 E29 E28 E27 E26 E25 Information 0
Bit 27 26 25 24 23
0
22
0
21
0
20
Explanation of the field contents: information Image of the information byte containing the process change In double-point indications, all odd number inputs correspond to OFF and all even number inputs correspond to ON.
247
Informations portion with 1 byte and timet

MSB Information LSB
E8 8 2
7
E7 7 2
6
E6 6 2
5
E5 5 24 212
E4 4 23 211
E3 3 22 210
E2 2 21 29
E1 1 20 28
Information Change Time (less sig.) x 10 ms 215 214 213 Time (more sig.) x 10 ms A
Bit 27 26 25 24 23
Change
Time val. (low)
Time val. (high)
B
22
C
21
D
20

information Change Time A B C D Image of the information byte containing the process change Identifies the process inputs which caused the spontaneous transmission. <0>...<59,999> Absolute partial time with a resolution of 10 ms (corresponds to 9 min. and 59.99 s) Free Free Not synchronized Not real time
248
Measrured value type of telegram
Two examples of this type of telegram are shown below.

q q
Measured value, 8 bits + sign Measured value, 11 bits + sign
Measured value, 8 bits + sign In SICAM eRTU the measured value coding is 12 bit + sign. However, in the SINAUT 8-FW telegram only resolutions of 8 bit + sign are transmitted.
MSB Measured value LSB
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
Measured value VZ
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Explanation of the contents of the field:

Measured value <-4096>...<+4095>: See manual of the "Analog Input Function Module AI32/16" for the ranges of measured values which can be represented and their assignment to current and voltage values. Sign Negative measured values are represented in two's complement.
VZ
249
Measured value, 11 bits + sign The measured value coding in the SICAM eRTU system is 12 bit + sign. However, in the SINAUT 8-FW telegram only resolutions of 11 bit + sign are transmitted. This type of telegram can also be parameterized with 72 information characters (i.e., 4 measured values + sign).
MSB LSB
24
Measured value 1
23 211 23 211
22 210 22 210
21 29 21 29
20 28 20 28
0 27 0 27
0 26 0 26
0 25 0 25
Measured value (less significant byte) VZ 24 Measured value (more significant byte) Measured value (less significant byte) VZ Measured value (more significant byte) 0
Bit 27 26 25 24 23
Measured value 2
0
22
0
21
0
20

Measured value <-4096>...<+4095>: See manual of the "Analog Input Function Module AI32/16" for the ranges of measured values which can be represented and their assignment to current and voltage values. Sign Negative measured values are represented in two's complement.
VZ
250
Switching command type of telegram

Information
MSB
LSB
A8
A7 22
2
6
A6 21 BK
2
5
A5 20
2
4
A4 23
2
3
A3 22 ZK
2
2
A2 21
21
A1 20
20
Information PB
2
7
Time val. (low) Bit

information The set information characters are output to the process. In double commands, the odd number outputs correspond to OFF and all even number outputs correspond to ON. Time identifier, binary-coded <0> Short time (e.g., for circuit breakers) <8> Long time (e.g., for isolator control) The time assigned to these three identifiers can be parameterized separately for each command. All other time identifiers can also be parameterized with fixed values (i.e., the same value for all commands). Command identifier, binary-coded <0> Switching command <1> Continuous command (continuous output) <6> Automatic reclosing Parity bit Supplements the number of long characters of all 6 bytes (address and information portion) so that it becomes an odd number. This parity bit is also used in addition to the check characters for telegram security.
ZK
BK
PB
251
11.4.4 Organizational Telegrams

Included in the SINAUT 8-FW telegram structure are a wide variety of organizational functions which are characteristic of this powerful telegram structure. The following table shows the functions triggered in the SICAM eRTU by the control center with organizational telegrams.
Table 11-17 Organizational telegrams in control direction Telegram type Check command Message repetition request/TFK positive acknowledgment Startup acknowledgment command Reset command Single scan command Group scan command Switch on telegram for time list Switch off telegram for time list Synchronization of the precise time Setting of calendar Switching addresses in lists on or off (Measured value selection) Scan of error bit pattern Polling command Telegram Designation SO1 SO2 Block No. 512 513
SO3 SO4 SO5 SO6 SO10 SO11 SO16 SO18 SO19
514 519 520 521 525 526 770_S 770_K 771
SO24 SO32
781
1
1) The polling command has its own telegram format (see page 5-44).
252
Organizational Telegrams (contd.)
The following table shows the organizational functions of the SICAM eRTU in monitoring direction.
Table 11-18 Organizational telegrams in monitoring direction Telegram type Check block Ackn. telegram "Synchronization" Ackn. telegram "Set calendar" Error bit pattern transfer (IFBIT) Operation bit pattern (ZBBIT) Telegram Designation O1 O7 O9 O13 O16 Block No. 512 770_S 770_k 781 1016
Block command
(block no. 512)
The control center can output check commands cyclically to the SICAM eRTU to monitor the transmission paths and the function of the SICAM eRTU. These commands are received by the SICAM eRTU, identified and returned to the control center as check telegrams with the same telegram number and the same information portion. Monitoring is handled by the control center. Every spontaneous, organizational or scanned telegram sent by the SICAM eRTU is supplied with a telegram sequence identification number (TFK) incremented by 1 (number range 1 to 30). The control center monitors the sequence to determine whether it is complete. Missing telegrams are specifically requested by the control center with specification of the telegram sequence identifier number. All spontaneous telegrams arriving while the request is running must be stored intermediately in the control center. After the request has been concluded successfully, the spontaneous telegrams are sorted in ascending order of their telegram sequence identifier numbers, and processed further in that order. This procedure achieves the following:
q q q
Telegram repetition
(block No. 513)
Spontaneous telegrams which have not been received are detected and then specifically requested. A request occurs immediately after the transmission path becomes clear again. The order of the telegrams can be reproduced, and distortion of information output by the control center cannot occur (as long as an overflow of the telegram sequence identifiers does not occur).
253
Startup acknowledgement
(block no. 514)
After a startup, the SICAM eRTU sends all telegrams with the telegram sequence identifier number 31. Based on this telegram sequence identifier number, the control center recognizes the startup of the SICAM eRTU, and responds with a startup acknowledgment command. In the SICAM eRTU, this startup acknowledgment command triggers the spontaneous transmission of the error bit pattern (telegram no. 781) with the telegram sequence identifier number 1 and with this the continued counting of the telegram sequence identifier. A remote reset command from the control center causes an internal reset of the MCP communications processor followed by a restart. In the SICAM eRTU, the single scan command from the control center triggers the one-time transmission of the telegram number contained in the information block of the telegram. For example, the single scan command can be used by the control center to specifically request telegrams not received during a general check.
Reset command
(block no. 519)
Single scan command

(block no. 520)
Group scan command

(block no. 521)
In the SICAM eRTU, a group scan command from the control center triggers the one-time transmission of the scan list contained in the information block of the telegram. The telegram addresses in the scan lists were set during parameterization. Scan lists are available for indications, counting values or measured values. The information can be mixed as desired. All telegram addresses stored in the activated list are transferred. Four lists are available when asymmetric transmission mode is used.
Switch lists on and off

(block Nos. 525 + 526)
In the SICAM eRTU, this command from the control center causes the requested list to be switched on or off. All telegram addresses parameterized in this list are transferred until the list is switched off again. If the SICAM eRTU does not have an external synchronization pulse and no separate WT channel is available for a synchronization pulse, the SICAM eRTU can only be synchronized via a time setting or synchronization telegram. Due to the 1-ms time resolution of the SICAM eRTU, the format of this telegram is not standard. The telegram is always transferred periodically at full "tens-minutes". The entire time in the SICAM eRTU is set again. The time in the telegram applies to the starting edge of the telegram. This makes synchronization independent of the transmission speed.
Time setting or synchronization telegram

(block No. 770)
Measured value selection

(block no. 771)
Measured value selection permits the control center to activate or inhibit transmission of specific measured value telegram addresses. The basic cycle list on the MCP communications processor is expanded dynamically for the duration of the measured value selection.
254
Error bit pattern

(block no. 781)
The error bit bar is a tool for detecting control center errors. Each parameterized, system-specific error or error relevant for the system management is entered here on its occurrence at the bit location assigned to it. Errors are collected in the error bit pattern starting at the time they were last acknowledged/deleted. There are three ways to access the error bit pattern of the SICAM eRTU:
q
Startup of SICAM eRTU
After receipt of the startup acknowledgment telegram from the control center, the SICAM eRTU performs a spontaneous, one-time transmission of the error bit pattern to the control center and then deletes it automatically.
q
Interrogation / deletion by the control center
The error bit pattern of the SICAM eRTU can always be scanned and deleted, if required, using the scan command (telegram no. 781). The error bit bar has the following telegram structure (also relevant for the system bit bar):
MSB
LSB
8 16 24 32
7 15 23 31
6 14 22 30
5 13 21 29
4 12 20 28
3 11 19 27
2 10 18 26
1 9 17 25
Error bits Error bits Error bits Error bits 0

Bit 27 26 25 24 23
0
22
0
21
0
20

Error bits The assignment of the error bits is identical with the system bit pattern and is specified by the parameterization of the system bit pattern. A sample assignment of the error bits is shown in Table 11-19.
255
Operation bit pattern

(block no. 1016)
The operation bit pattern indicates the current status of pending errors. Errors provoking a SICAM eRTU restart are not marked in the operation bit pattern. Like in the error bit pattern, a bit position is also reserved in the operation bit pattern for the status of each event. A bit remains set as long as the error persists. The operation bit pattern is spontaneously transmitted to the control center in case of each change of a system status message. In addition to this, it can be transmitted in the basic cycle, in interrogation lists or via an individual request. The assignment of the operation bit pattern can be parameterized by the user. This parameterization also specifies the error bit pattern. In the following table you find a proposal with regard to the assignment of the operation bit pattern.
256
Table 11-19 Assignment of the operation bit pattern (proposal) Error identification 1 Error bit 1 ) Text in SICAM plusTOOLS Meaning RE/ FE from 2)m
M_Input_malfunc
Message input disturbed
RE/ FE RE/ FE RE/ FE RE RE/ FE RE
S7_CPU(GF)
MV_Input_malfunc
Measured value input malfunction Process output malfunction
S7_CPU(GF)
B_Output_malfunc
S7_CPU(GF)
7 8
8 9
Pulse Error Channel Error
Pulse error, control direction Channel Error
TC Channel TC Channel
12
13
Telegram in receive direction Full-cyclic transmission running Process output malfunc
Received telegram overwritten Cyclic operation (Full cycle is running) Process output malfunction (at MCP)
TC Channel
13
14
RE/ FE RE
TC Channel
15
16
TC Channel
16 19
17 20
Command not executed Command not executed Chatter_inhibit_activ Contact chatter (System error) Time invalid (at time management DCF)
RE RE/ FE RE/ FE RE/ FE RE RE/ FE RE/ FE RE/ FE
TC Channel S7_CPU(GF)
21
22
Time_invalid
MCP
25
26
Telegr_mem_Warn_limi Telegram memory warning t limit Telegr_mem_Overflow No signaling voltage Telegram memory overflow Indication device malfunction (Signaling voltage missing) Fuse fault
TC Channel
26 28
27 29
TC Channel S7_CPU(GF)
29
30
I0_0
CR
30
31
I0_7
Transmission level error
CR
1) 2)
Error bits which are not listed are not assigned GF = Group fault
257
Polling command
(only available with modulation mode
DPDM)
In addition to the point-to-point and multiple point-to-point transmission modes, in which the substation is directly connected to the control center by a transmission channel, there is the so-called line configuration (see Chapter 11.1.2). In this configuration, the data are transmitted from the substation to the control center in master/slave mode. This procedure is referred to as multi-point traffic or polling mode. A short "Polling command" telegram is used to poll the individual SICAM eRTUs:
MSB Information LSB
20
About
22
21
20 IP
23 PP
23
22 23
22
21 22
21
20 21
20
Station number Protection information
Time val. (low) Bit 27 26 25
24

Station number Can be parameterized (1 to 127)
Information 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit Position 22 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 21 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 20 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Function
Quick check (see Chapter 11.4.6) Quick scan (see Chapter 11.4.6) Scan list 1 Scan list 2 Scan list 3 Scan list 4 Startup, general interrogation
Protection
Telegram security with d=2 (one pause and pulse parity character each)
258
11.4.5 Pulse Code Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram

The pulse code modulated SINAUT 8-FW telegram (see Chapter 11.1.1) has a data frame based on DIN 19244 and is always used in operating mode "send/without confirmation". The telegram structure uses the "variable length" type of telegram. It has its own monitoring routines (e.g., telegram sequence identification and test record) to check for transmission and data loss. The address and information portion corresponds to the layout of the pulse duration modulated telegram. See Chapter 11.4.2 to Chapter 11.4.4 for more details. Telegram security uses a checksum byte and corresponds to a Hamming distance of d = 4. The transmission speed can be set separately for the control direction and the monitoring direction. Transmission rates of 50 bits/sec to 38400 bits/sec can be set.
Start char. = 68hex Block length Block length Start char. = 68hex Header
Address portion
User area Information portion
Check sum End char. = 16hex
suc221.wmf
Fig. 11-12 Layout of a pulse code modulated SINAUT8-FW telegram
259
11.4.6 Multi-Point Transmission SINAUT 8-FW Telegram

Quick check / quick scan (only available
with telegram structure DPDM
In asymmetric communication systems, the quick check procedure is used to speed up the transmission of spontaneous process events in the control center. Control Center Case 1: No events in any SICAM eRTUs
Global scan
SICAM eRTU
QC
No events: eRTU does not reply
Time monitoring triggered Scan the next eRTU
Case 2: An event has occurred in only one SICAM eRTU

Event occurs Global scan
QC
Response with scan request for spontaneous events
Explicit call of the eRTU with a scan of the spontaneous events
QS
Transmission of the spontaneous events
Further processing
Case 3: Events have occurred in several SICAM eRTUs

Event in 1st eRTU Event in 2nd eRTU Global scan
QC
Event in nth eRTU
(pulse error)
occurs A collision
r Several eRTUseply at the same time and make scan requests for spontaneous events
Scan cycle with explicit call of the individual eRTU
QS
Further processing same as case 2
suc220.wmf
Fig. 11-13 Quick check procedure for asymmetric transmission
260
Each time a SICAM eRTU is specifically polled, the control center sends a "global scan to all SICAM eRTUs". Three reactions to this scan are possible:
q
None of the SICAM eRTUs has had an event since the last transmission. In this case, there is no response, and the procedure is concluded after a time monitor expires. An event has occurred in one of the addressed SICAM eRTUs. The SICAM eRTU with spontaneous information reports this in its response to the scan of the control center. The control center then triggers the transmission of the data via a specific scan of this SICAM eRTU. Events have occurred in several addressed SICAM eRTUs. In this case, all SICAM eRTUs send scan requests simultaneously to the control center. A collision occurs and the control center recognizes the destroyed telegrams. The control center starts a Quick Scan cycle and calls the data selectively from the SICAM eRTUs.
261
11.5 Control Center Link with the DNP V3.00 Telegram

The DNP V3.00 (Distributed Network Protocol) communications protocol is based on an earlier version of the IEC 870-5 specification. Just like the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, DNP V3.00 uses a serial physical interface as defined in the OSI layer model, see Chapter 11.2.1. The main differences between the protocols are found in the data link layer. The DNP V3.00 protocol has the following features:
q q q q
Format class FT3 (for asynchronous transmission!) Variable telegram length Address of control center and station contained in the telegram Balanced Mode
262

DNP V3.00 is a protocol that uses telegrams with variable length. The telegram fragment is equivalent to the application protocol data unit (APDU). Link Layer In the link layer, up to 255 bytes of application data are packed into one frame. To this frame the transport protocol control information (TPCI) is added. If more than one frame needs to be transmitted, the FIR bit is set in the control information of the first frame, and the FIN bit is deleted. The number of the telegram (Sequence No.) is incremented by each further frame to be sent. The FIN bit is set in the transport header TCPI of the last frame. The link header LPCI contains:
q q q q q
Start character Telegram length Control information Receiver and sender address CRC check character
Physical Layer
The physical layer generates from the telegram frames variable FT3 telegram formats adds 2 check bytes every 16 bytes and sends these telegrams via a serial interface to the communication partner. A FT3 telegram can be up to 292 bytes long. In the SICAM eRTU, the number of FT3 telegrams can be set to between 0 and 63 in monitoring direction; in control direction only one FT3 telegram is permissible, i.e. both the FIR and the FIN bit are set.
263
Telegram fragment
Start
with transport layer function TPCI

FIR = 1 FIN = 0 Sequence = x
Link Layer
Physical Layer
TPDU
Frame 1
LPCI 1..16 data bytes

FIR = 0 FIN = 0 Sequence = x+1
TPCI
CRC
1..16
APDU TPDU
FIR = 0 FIN = 1 Sequence = x+2
Frame 2
data bytes CRC
1..16
data bytes CRC
TPCI
TPDU
End
Frame 3
APDU Application Protocol Data Unit TPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit TPCI Transport Protocol Control Information LPDU Link Protocol Data Unit LPCI Link Protocol Control Information CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRC
suc230n.wmf
Fig. 11-14 Example of a telegram layout in DNP V3.00 with 3 frames
The above figure shows the generation of the individual frames from one great telegram fragment in the application layer. This functions is taken over by the transport layer of the link layer. The frames that are generated in this way are provided with the transport layer control information TPCI (see Transport Header,Page 266) and passed on to the Physical layer. Each frame (TPDU incl. TPCI) is provided with a link header (LPCI) and transmitted in accordance with the FT3 specifications of the IEC 608705-1 standard.
264
Link Header
The link header LPCI ensures correct addressing and provides the communication partner with the necessary control information.
Link Header LPCI

1. Byte 2. Byte 3. Byte 4. Byte 5. Byte 6. Byte 7. Byte 8. Byte 9. Byte 10. Byte 11. Byte 12. Byte
startbyte = 05hex startbyte = 64hex Length Control Destination Length Control field Target address
Source
Source address
CRC Transport Header Start APDU
Check byte
suc232.wmf
Fig. 11-15 Link Header in DNP V3.0
Each frame (see Figure11-14) is preceded by a link header (LPCI). After the two start bytes, there is a statement of the length in which the control field, the target and source address of the header and the number of the subsequent data bytes are considered. In the control field, the control information for the link layer of the communication partner is entered. The target address contains the address of the communication partner, the source address the sender's own address. Corruption of the link header data, beginning with the first start byte and ending with the last byte of the source address, is prevented by the two CRC check bytes. Immediately after the link header follows the transport header TPCI and up to 249 bytes of application data.
265
Control Field
MSB LSB
1 DIR PRM 0
Bit 27 26
FCB FCV 0
25
23
22
21
20
DFC
24 23
Function
22 21 20
Explanation of the field contents: Function Type of telegram (e.g. message with/without response, acknowledgment). The code may have different meanings for the two transmission directions. Frame count bit valid Frame count bit Data flow control Primary Message: This bit is set in messages from the initiating primary station. "1" for messages from the control center to the SICAM eRTU "0" for messages from the SICAM eRTU to the control center
FCV FCB DFC PRM DIR
A detailed explanation of the codes can be found in the document DNP V3.0 Intelligent Electronic Device (IED), Certification Procedure, Subset Level 2. Transport Header The transport header TPCI coordinates the transmission of the individual frames. It identifies all frames by ascending numbers, and additionally the first frame (fragment start) and the last frame (fragment end).
MSB LSB
FIN FIR
Bit 27 26 25 24
Sequence
23 22 21 20
Explanation of the field contents: FIR FIN Sequence 1 in first frame, otherwise 0 1 in last frame, otherwise 0 Number of frame, first frame starts with 0
266
11.5.2 Application Area

The application data (APDU) consist of
q q q
Application header Object header Data (information object)
Request Header
APDU
APCI DUI
Applic. Control
Function code
Response Header
Applic. Control
IO
Function code
Internal Indication
DUI Object IO
Object Header Variation Qualifier Range
DUI
IO
APDU APCI DUI IO
Application Protocol Data Unit Application Protocol Control Information Data Unit Identifier Information Object
suc231.wmf
Fig. 11-16 Example of the application data (APDU) in the DNP V3.00 protocol
Application Header
The application header APCI (Application Protocol Control Information) describes the data portion of fragment level; it consists of:
q q q
Application Control AC Function Code FC Internal Indication IIN (only in monitoring direction, response header)
267
Application Control
The FIR and FIN bits are set according to the transmission mode (single fragment or multiple fragment processing).
MSB LSB
0
Bit 2
7
24
23
22
21
20
Explanation of the field contents: FIR FIN Confirm Unsolicited Sequence First fragment Last fragment Is set when the application expects an acknowledgment FC 0 from the partner station. Is always 0 in the SICAM eRTU 0 .. 31
268
Unsolicited
Sequence
Confirm
FIR
FIN
Function Code
The function codes that are possible in the SICAM eRTU are listed in the table below.
Table 11-20 Function code of the SICAM eRTU Code (dec) 0 1 2 Function Confirm Read Write Description Confirms a telegram fragment. Requests specific data from the SICAM eRTU. SICAM eRTU responds with the corresponding available data. Stores specific data in the partner station. SICAM eRTU responds with operational status. Is currently used to delete the Device Restart Bit in IIN (Internal Indication) and to synchronize the substation clock. Selects a specific command SICAM eRTU responds with operational status. Activates/deactivates the previously selected command. SICAM eRTU responds with operational status.
3 4
Select Execute
5 7 8
Direct execute Activates/deactivates the specific command. SICAM eRTU responds with operational status. Immediate restore Copies the specific data into a restore buffer. SICAM eRTU responds with operational status.
Immediate Copies the specific data into a restore buffer. restore without No response from SICAM eRTU. acknowledgment Deactivates the "Unsolicited Report by Exception" mode Inhibits the operating mode "Unsolicited Report by Exception" SICAM eRTU responds with operational status. The response is currently always OK because no spontaneous responses are supported.
21
23
Runtime Enables the control center to calculate the signal measurement runtimes between the SICAM eRTU. SICAM eRTU responds with operational status and the current signal runtime. Is currently used in connection with the write function. Response Response to a requested message.
129
269
Internal Indication
The internal indication is an information element that is used to transmit internal states and diagnostic results to the control center. The internal indication exists only in monitoring direction. 1. octet
MSB LSB
Bit
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
Restart
Need Time
Class 3
Class 2
Dev.Trouble
Class 1
21
2. octet
MSB LSB
Bit
27
26
25
24
23
22
Already Exec
Buffer Overflow
Out of Range
Bad Config
Object Unknown
Reserved
Reserved
A detailed explanation of all internal indications can be found in the documentation DNP V3.0 Intelligent Electronic Device (IED), Certification Procedure, Subset Level 2.
270
Bad Function
All Stations
20
Local
Object Header
The object header DUI (Data Unit Information) consists of:

q q q q
Object Variation Qualifier Range
The requested or sent type of information is described by the object field, which consists of object and variation. The types of information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU are listed in the table below.
Table 11-21 Types of information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU Object Request (substation must evaluate)
Function code Qualifier code
Response (control station must evaluate)

Function code Qualifier code
Obj. Var. 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 10 10 12 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 00 01 02 00 01 02 03 00 02 01 00 01 05 00 01 05 00
Description Binary input - all variations Binary input (single bit) Binary input with status Change of binary input - all variations (change due to class 1 request) Change of binary input without time stamp Change of binary input with time stamp Change of binary input with relative time Binary output - all variations Binary output with status Switching command Binary metered value - all variations Change of 32-bit binary metered value with flags Change of 32-bit binary metered value without flags Metered value freeze - all variations Freeze of 32-bit metered value with flags Freeze of 32-bit metered value without flags Change of metered value
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3, 4, 5 1, 7, 8 1, 7, 8 1, 7, 8 1 1 1 1
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 129 129 28 28 129 129 28 28 129 129 28 mirrored 129 129 129, IIN=2/1 28 28 129 129 01 28
271
Table 11-21 Types of information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU Object Request (substation must evaluate) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3, 4, 5 2 23 * * * * * * * * * * * 129 129 129 IIN=2/1 129 129 129 mirrored 07, quantity =1 28 28 129 129 28 28 Response (control station must evaluate) 129 129 28 28
22 22 30 30 30 32 32 32 40 41 50 52
01 05 00 02 04 00 02 04 00 02 01 02
Change of 32-bit metered value without time stamp Change of 32-bit metered value with time stamp Analog input - all variations 16-bit analog input (raw value) with flags 16-bit analog input (raw value) without flags Change of analog event - all variations (change due to class 2 request) Change of 16-bit analog event without time stamp Change of 16-bit analog event with time stamp Analog output status - all variations 16-bit analog output Clock synchronization Runtime measurement
60 60 60 60 80
01 02 03 04 01
Class 0 data Class 1 data Class 2 data Class 3 data Internal Indications
1 1 1 1 1 2
* * * * * 00 IIN=1/7 129 129 -
IIN = 1/7: Internal Indication 1st octet, 7th bit, Device Restart IIN = 2/1: Internal Indication 2nd octet, 1st bit, Requested Object Unknown
272
Qualifier
The qualifier describes the meaning of the range field. It consists of:
q q
Index Size Qualifier Code

MSB LSB
Bit 2
7
Index Size
2
6
Qualifier Code
4
22
21
20
Qualifier code
0 1 3 4 6 7 8 8-bit start/stop address in the range field 16-bit start/stop address in the range field 8-bit absolute address statement in the range field 16-bit absolute address statement in the range field no range field 8-bit number of objects 16-bit number of objects
Index Size
0 1 2 no index 1 byte of index 2 bytes of index
Range
The range field specifies the number of objects or the first/last object address. The size and structure of the range field is defined by the qualifier. If the qualifier code is 6, the range field is omitted.
273
Error indications
If the SICAM eRTU detects an error in the request from the control center, it responds by internal indications, 2nd octet, according to the following table:
Table 11-22 Error indications IIN Bit 0 Indication Function unknown Object unknown Description This function is not supported by the degree of implementation, see Table 11-20, Function code of the SICAM eRTU, on page 269 This object is not supported by the degree of implementation, see Table 11-21, Types of information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU, on page 271 The qualifier code information received does not correspond to the parameterized data objects. No data are transmitted.
Parameter error
274
11.6 Control Center Link with the TELEGYR 800 Telegram

SICAM eRTU supports the protocol TELEGYR 800 in the request mode. The TELEGYR 800-request mode operation is closely related to the IEC 60870-5-101 unbalanced mode. The TELEGYR 800 protocol is pulse code modulated and consists of the following layers:
q q q
Physical bit transmission layer (physical layer) Link layer Application layer
Physical layer
The physical (bit transmission) layer fulfils the following tasks:

q q q q q q q q
Conversion of the signal to the interface level Galvanic isolation (2.5 kV) Monitoring of the signal quality Bit and telegram synchronization Conversion from parallel to serial telegram presentation Adding and removing telegram delimiters (start / end characters) Detection of telegram format errors Protection against the evaluation of corrupted telegrams and protection of telegrams against loss by creating and checking checkcodes and by acknowledgment. Format class FT1.2 is fulfilled (equivalent to a Hamming distance d = 4); it is thus compliant with integrity class I2.
Interfaces
Connect the lines to the control centers at the two 25-pole ports X1/X2 on the front of the MCP. X1 and X2 are parameterizable as V.24/V.28 interface - asynchronous. The possible transmission speed is between 50 bits/s and 115.200 bits/ s and depends on the external conditions.
275
Link layer
The link layer controls the transmission procedure. Its main tasks are:
q q
Performing the basic services (e. g. Request / Respond, Send / Confirm). Adding the control fields in telegrams with mode-specific information.
Application layer
The application layer identifies and handles the telegram information. Its main tasks are:
q q q
Splitting of information blocks Image management and transmission mode control Command management
The Protocol TELEGYR 800 knows software and hardware addresses for the addressing of the single information objects. Representation In a TELEGYR 800 telegram each data byte is complemented with a start, a parity and a stop character. The parity is even. The following figure shows those characters that are transmitted and those that are shown in telegram images.
Bit sequence on the line
11. 10. 9. 8.
64
7.
32
6.
16
5. 23
8
4. 22
4
3. 21
2
2.
1
1. Bit
Stop Parity 27 bit bit 128
26
1
25
1
24
0
20 Start
bit
Start character (=68hex) User information
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte n-2
Check sum character

for entire telegram End character (= 16hex)
1 1
x 1 0 0 0
Check sum
1 0 1 1 0
0 0
Byte n-1 Byte n
Characters represented in telegram screens Transmitted characters

suc215.wmf
Fig. 11-1 Representation of TELEGYR 800 telegrams
276
Rules of transmission
Transmission is subject to 6 rules: Rule 1 Rule 2 Rule 3 In quiescent state 1 signal is present on the line. A character consists of a start bit, 8 information bits, an even parity bit and a stop bit. Quiescent states between the characters of a telegram are permitted or not permitted depending on the parameterization. The user data are finished by an 8-bit checksum (CS). The checksum is the sum of all user data without carry. The receiver checks the characters for start bit, stop bit and an even parity bit. The telegram is checked for the start character, the telegram checksum and the end character. If an error is found during one of the checks, the telegram is rejected, otherwise it must be released for further processing. Between the telegrams a minimum interval of 33 bits quiescent state is necessary, so that in case of an error as per Rule 5 the receiver can be synchronized.
Rule 4 Rule 5
Rule 6
277

Three telegram variants are used in the TELEGYR 800 telegram:
q q q
Telegrams with variable length Telegrams with fixed length Single characters
The following figure shows the different telegram structures. Telegram with variable length
Start char. = 68hex Block length Block length Start char. = 68hex Address field Function field Header
*)
Telegram with fixed length

Start char. = 10hex Address field
Function field
Single characters
Header User area Single char. = E5hex
Information address User area
Information object
long block 1) also called
Picture_7_2.wmf
Fig. 11-2 Layout of TELEGYR 800 telegrams in the SICAM eRTU system
Start / end character
The start and end characters delimit the telegram and are part of the telegram protection. In addition, the start character identifies the telegram: Start character = 68 hex:Telegram with variable length (long block) Start character = 10 hex:Telegram with fixed length (short block) Start character = E5 hex: Single character
278
Block length
The block length field in the header of telegrams with variable length contains the number of bytes of the user data area. The value can be up to 255. The telegram length is obtained by adding 6 bytes to the content of the block length field (4 bytes header, 1 byte each for checksum and end character). The second block length field repeats the value of the first and is used by the link layer for checking the telegram.
Application area
The user data area in the telegram consists of:

q q q q
Address field Function field Information address Information object
Address field
The address field contains the station address (COM No.) and serves for the recognition of the SICAM eRTU, both in control and in monitoring direction. Its length is one byte. The content of the address field can be parameterized:
q q
0 ... 254 for any SICAM eRTU 255 for telegrams to all SICAM eRTUs of one line
Function field
The function field contains information about the direction of the telegrams and control information and an adddress field expansion.
MSB LSB
AKC (incl. SFB)

Function field
FA AEH AEL RB
20
Control direction Monitoring direction
BA
Bit 27
26
OF
25
AQ
24
AS
23 22 21
279
Explanation of the field contents: AKC Call-Control-Code with fixed sequential bit (Bit 24 = SFB). The fixed sequential bit makes it possible to recognize information loss and information multiplication.
Bit
27 26 25 at link layer 24 (FA = 0)
Meaning
at application layer (FA = 1)
0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0
0 0 1 1 1 1
0 Reset SFB 1 Status scan 0 1 0 1 send with SFB = 0 send with SFB = 1 send with SFB = 0 send with SFB = 1
FA
The function selection states the layer for which the Call-Control-Code is valid. 0 Call-Controll-Code is valid for the link layer 1 Call-Controll-Code is valid for the link layer
AE
The Address field expansion AEh and AEl is not used in the SICAM eRTU and has always got the value 0. Direction bit of the information: 0 at transmission in monitoring direction (to the control center) 1 at transmission in control direction (to the control center)
RB
BA
Operating demand of the substation to the control station: 0 no additional data available 1 no additional data available for transmission
OF
0ffline / Online 0 Online 1 Offline
AQ AS
Order acknowledgement: This bit is not used and has got the value 0. Request blocking: This bit is not used and has got the value 0.
280
11.6.3 User Area in the TELEGYR 800 Telegram

Information address In the SICAM eRTU the information address of TELEGYR 800 contains the following criteria:
q q q
Station number (optional, depending on addressing variant) Information type Information address
Addressing variants:
q q
Identification via hardware address Identification via software address
Hardware address
Addressing criteria: Flags Station number Expanded description of address layout 0 to 1 020
Software bit (SW- 0 = the previous address is a hardware address Bit) (1 = the previous address is a software address) Cabinet No. Chassis No. Slot No. Point No. 0 to 7 0 to 4 0 to 15 in chassis 0 to 255
All address elements (except flags) must be parameterized explicitly for each information point.
Table 11-23 Addressing variants Hardware addressing variant

Short hardware address without station No. Short hardware address with station No. Long hardware address without station No. Long hardware address with station No.
Parameterized station No.

complies with own station No. different from own station No. complies with own station No. different from own station No.
Cabinet No.
0 0 >0 >0
Point No.
<32 <32 Irrelevant Irrelevant
281
Software address
Addressing criteria: Flags Station number Expanded description of address layout 0 to 1 020
Software bit (SW- 1 = the previous address is a software address Bit) (0 = the previous address is a hardware address) Point No. 0 to 32 767 (clearly within a station number)
Table 11-24 Addressing variants Software addressing variant

Software address without station No. Software address with station No.
Parameterized station No.

complies with own station No. different from own station No.
Analysis of address layout
The content of the field Flags specifies the further processing of the information and controls its forwarding to the user program.
Flags
Address IAC E S
Explanation of the field contents: IAC 0 1 2 3 Expansion IAC in next byte Indication without time, no IAC expansion Indication with time, no IAC expansion Spontaneous measured value, no IAC expansion
Address expansion bit 0 Short address (only for hardware addresses) 1 Long address, software bit available Station number bit 0 Address without station No. 1 Address with station No.
282
Hardware address layouts
Explanation of the field contents: E S SW IAC 1 Address expansion bit (1 = long address) 1 Station number bit (1 = with station number) 1 SW-Bit (1 = an SW-point number follows) Information-Type-Character (Information type)
Long hardware address without station number
Address
IAC>0 Cab.I
E=1 Chassis
S=0
SW=0 Cab.h Slot
Point
Information
Long hardware address without station number
Address
IAC>0
E=1
S=1
Station number high SW=0 Cab.h Slot
Station number low Cab.I Chassis Point

Information
Long hardware address without station number, with IAC expansion
Address
IAC=0
E=1
S=0
SW=0 Cab.h
IAC expansion Cab.I Chassis Point

Information
Slot
283
Long hardware address with station number, with IAC expansion
Address
IAC=0
E=1
S=1
Station number high
IAC expansion Station number low Cab.I Chassis Point

Information
SW=0 Cab.h Slot
Short hardware address without station number
Address
IAC>0 Slot low
E=0
S=0
Chassis Point
Slot
information
Short hardware address with station number
Address
IAC>0
E=0
S=1
Station number high Chassis Point Slot
Station number low Slot low

Information
Short hardware address without station number, with IAC expansion
Address
IAC=0
E=0
S=0 IAC expansion
Chassis
Slot
Slot low
Information
Point
284
Short hardware address with station number, with IAC expansion
Address
IAC=0
E=0
S=1
Station number high
IAC expansion Station number low Slot low

Information
Chassis Point
Slot
Software address layouts
Software address without station number
Address
IAC>0 0
E=1
S=0
0 Point high
SW=1
Point low
Information
Software address with station number
Address
IAC>0
E=1
S=1
Station number high SW=1 0
Station number low 0 Point high Point low

Information
Software address without station number, with IAC expansion
Address
IAC=0
E=1
S=0
SW=1
IAC expansion 0 Point high Point low

Information
285
Software address with station number, with IAC expansion
Address
IAC=0
E=1
S=1
Station number high
IAC expansion Station number low 0 Point high Point low

Information
SW=1
Information objects
When IAC has the value zero, there is an IAC expansion with values of >3.
Table 11-25 Information in monitoring direction IAC 0 1 2 3 IACex 10 15 16 17 18 25 Meaning Telegram contains IAC expansion Indication without time Indication with time stamp Measured-values Meaning Metered values, requested GI: Blocks of indications GI: Blocks of analog measured values GI: Blocks of digital measured values GI: Blocks of system messages Own station number
*) *) *) *) *) *)
*) *)
*) With SW /HW point number
286
Table 11-26 Information in monitoring direction IAC 128 131 134 135 144 145 160 161 162 163 165 Meaning Impulse command (single command and double command) Setpoint command (default value) PBN command Time synchronizing command Metered-value request Metered-value request General interrogation command for all indications General interrogation command for all measured values General interrogation command for all system messages Acknowledge command for system messages Scanning own station number
*) *)
*) With SW /HW point number
The content of the information object depends on the information type (IAC) (see tables above). The information object consists of:
q q q
Information Status of the information and the time assigned to the information (optional)
287
11.6.4 Information in Monitoring Direction
Table 11-27 Information in monitoring direction IAC1: Single and double-point indication without time stamp or system message Addressing type Station number Address of the information object Information in the information object All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 Status of the indication Single-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 = On Double-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 = On 00 or 11 = Failure Descriptors: I = Invalid bit V = Double-point indication (= 1 at double-point indication) R = Feedback bit (= 1 when in time after command) All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 Status of the indication Single-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 = On Double-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 = On 00 or 11 = Failure Descriptors: G = Coarse time = 1 (i. e. Milli seconds up to hours) G = Coarse time = 0 (i. e. Milli seconds up to seconds) I = Invalid bit V = Double-point indication (= 1 at double-point indication) R = Feedback bit (= 1 when in time after command) Time: Hours: 0 ... 23 Minutes: 0 ... 59 Seconds: 0 ... 59 Milliseconds: 0 ... 999 Time error bits: F = 1 = Time wrong (e. g. time never set by Master)
IAC2: Single and double-point indication with long time stamp
Addressing type Station number Address of the information object Information in the information object
288
Table 11-27 Information in monitoring direction (Forts.) IAC3: Single measured value without time stamp (for measured values, bit patterns and transformer taps) Addressing type Station number Address of the information object All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 Address offset per data point - for measured values analog: 1 - for bit pattern, transformer taps: 16 Status of the measured value: -32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%) (Two's complement, only even values are valid) Descriptors: I = Invalid bit (= 1, if invalid, not current, Overflow or if step transformer in intermediate position) All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 Address offset per data point - for measured values analog: 1 - for bit pattern, transformer taps: 16 The amount of the set V-bits shows the number of the following metered values. From V-bit to V-bit the address increases by 1. Every gap has as result an additional address point of 1. Counter reading 0 ... 9.999.999 (i. e. overflow happens at) 9.999.999) Polling time: 0 Descriptors: FZI = Error on the meter pulse input (e. g. closed-circuit current) ZNG = Counter value never set (always stays on 1) SNI = Station initialized new (= 1) ZUE = Counter value overflow (over 9.999.999 restart at 0) All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 Address offset per data point - for measured values analog: 1 - for bit pattern, transformer taps: 16 Metered value 1 is transmitted. The lowestvalue V-bit is set.
Information in the information object
IAC10: Single current metered values after GI scan
Addressing type Station number Address first information object
Set of the metered values available (V-Set)
IAC10: Single current metered values spontaneous
Addressing type Station number Address first information object
Set of the metered values available (V-Set)
289
Table 11-27 Information in monitoring direction (Forts.) Information in the information object Counter reading 0 ... 9.999.999 (i. e. overflow happens at) 9.999.999) Freezing time: Day, hour, minute of local freezing Descriptors: FZI = Error on the meter pulse input (e. g. closed-circuit current) ZNG = Counter value never set (always stays on 1) SNI = Station initialized new (= 1) ZUE = Metered value overflow (over 9.999.999 restart at 0) All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 (0 or a multiple of 8) The amount of the set V-bits shows the number of the following indication bytes. From V-bit to V-bit the address increases by 8. Every gap has as result an additional address point of 8. S = Status (0/1) of the 8 bit per indication byte, not depending on whether these are Single-point or double-point indications. I = Invalid bits to the status above (1 = invalid) The invalid bits are per status bit available. The status is also invalid, if it is set RTU-internally to not topical set to All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 The amount of the set V-bits shows the number of the following measured values. From V-bit to V-bit the address increases by 1. Every gap has as result an additional address point of 1. Status of the measured values (maximally 8): -32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%) (Two's complement, only even values are valid) Descriptors: I = Invalid bit (= 1, if invalid, or not current)
IAC15: GI blocks of indications
Addressing type Station number Address first information object Set to available indication bytes (V-Set)
IAC16: GI blocks of measured values analog (for measured values)
Addressing type Station number Address first information object Set of the measured values available (V-Set)
290
Table 11-27 Information in monitoring direction (Forts.) IAC17: GI blocks of measured values digital (for bit patterns and transformer taps) Addressing type Station number Address first information object Set of the measured values available (V-Set) All HW and SW address variants Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 (multiple of 16) The amount of the set V-bits shows the number of the following measured values. From V-bit to V-bit the address increases by 16. Every gap has as result an additional address point of 16. Status of the measured values (maximally 8): -32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%) (Two's complement, only even values are valid) Descriptors: I = Invalid bit (= 1, if invalid, or not current) only SW address variants (SW=1) Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number = 0 The amount of the set V-bits shows the number of the following indication bytes. From V-bit to V-bit the address increases by 8. Every gap has as result an additional address point of 8. S = status (0/1) current status of bit (parameterize system messages as single-point messages with retention buffer and reset type by command) E = Event bit indicates if the status since the last acknowledgement (IAC163) has ever changed to ON. No hardware / software address Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SG-Bit = 0
IAC18: scanned system messages
Addressing type Station number Address first information object Set to available indication bytes (V-Set)
IAC25: Own station number
Addressing type Station number
291
11.6.5 Information in Control Direction

In control direction, pulse commands, set-point values and time synchronization commands are transmitted separately. Similar commands can be transmitted together for all other commands.
Table 11-28 Information in control direction IAC128: Pulse command (for single-point and double-point commands) Addressing type Software address with station number (E = 1, S = 1, SW = 1) or hardware address (long) with station number (E = 1, S = 1, SW = 0) Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767(unique in RTU) or HW address with: Point-No. 0 ... 255 (only even point numbers), Slot No. 0 ... 15, Chassis No. = 0 to 7, Cabinet No. = 0 to 3, Command direction: 0 = OFF 1 = ON with inverted 16-Bit-CRC according to IEC TC57 for the format FT3 (Version 1985): 216 + 214 + 212 + 211 + 29 + 28 + 27 + 24 + 21 + 1 The MS-Bit of the first address byte is processed first. This Code security results in a Hamming distance of 8.
Station number Address of the information object
Information
CRC-Code security via the 5 data bytes of the command, including IAC
292
Table 11-28 Information in control direction (Forts.) IAC131: Set-point command Addressing type Software address with station number (E = 1, S = 1, SW = 1) hardware address (long) with station number (E = 1, S = 1, SW = 0) Can be parameterized in the range 0... 1020 SW number 0 ... 32767 (unique in RTU) or HW address with: Point No. 0 ... 255 (only even point numbers), Slot No. 0 ... 15, Chassis No. = 0 to 7, Cabinet No. = 0 to 3, -32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%) (Two's complement) with inverted 16-Bit-CRC according to IEC TC57 for the format FT3 (Version 1985): 216 + 214 + 212 + 211 + 29 + 28 + 27 + 24 + 21 + 1 The MS-Bit of the first address byte is processed first. This Code security results in a Hamming distance of 8. No hardware / software address Station number 0 to 999 Command address 0 to 9999 Command direction: 1: OFF, 2: ON with inverted 16-Bit-CRC according to IEC TC57 for the format FT3 (Version 1985): 216 + 214 + 212 + 211 + 29 + 28 + 27 + 24 + 21 + 1 The MS-Bit of the first address byte is processed first. This Code security results in a Hamming distance of 8. No software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254, 255). With the link address 255 the telegram always is directed to all stations. Year 0 ... 99, month 1 ... 12, day 1 ...31, Weekday 1 ... 7 (Monday = 1), Hour 0 ... 23, minunte 0 ... 59, Milliseconds 0 ... 999, No summer time bit
Station number Address of the information object
Transmitted setpoint value CRC-Code security via the 5 address bytes of the command, including IAC plus setpoint value
IAC134: PBN command (double-point command)
Addressing type Information
CRC-Code security via the 18 data bytes of the command, including IAC plus setpoint value
IAC135: Time synchronization command
Time for synchronizing
293
Table 11-28 Information in control direction (Forts.) IAC144: Order to transmit the metered values Addressing type Station number No software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254, 255). With the link address 255 the telegram always is directed to all stations. Metered values which are assigned to the same groups in the RTU, are transmitted. No software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254, 255). With the link address 255 the telegram always is directed to all stations. Metered values which are assigned to the same groups in the RTU, are transmitted. No software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254, 255). With the link address 255 the telegram always is directed to all stations. No software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254, 255). With the link address 255 the telegram always is directed to all stations. No software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254, 255). With the link address 255 the telegram always is directed to all stations. Station number of original station Addressing type Station number Irrelevant No hardware / software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254, 255). With the link address 255 the telegram always is directed to all stations. No software address Missing In the link address of the telegram is the link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254).
Polling group set IAC145: Order for the transmission of the locally frozen metered values Addressing type Station number
Polling group set IAC160: General interrogation command for all indications Addressing type Station number
IAC161: General interrogation command for all measured values
IAC162: General interrogation command for all system indications
IAC163: Acknowledgeme nt system messages
IAC165: Send own station number
294
Anhang
Inhalt A.1 A.2 A.3 Indications of the Transmission Protocols Indications of the Substation Interface Indications of the Bay Device Protocols 296 299 301
295
A Anhang
A.1
Indications of the Transmission Protocols

Indications of the Transmission Protocols
q q q q q
IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-104 SINAUT 8-FW DNP V3.00 TELEGYR 800
Indications of the Transmission Protokols Protocol IEC 101 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101 SINAUT DNP TG 800 Error text short/long Pulse error
Table A-1
Alarm no. 61446
F006hex 61447
Channel error (receive)
F007hex 61448
Overwrite receive buffer SINAUT
F008hex 61449
TG 800 Full cycle running SINAUT
F009hex 61451 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 Command output error
F00Bhex 61452
Command not executed
F00Chex 61456
Substation disrupted
F010hex
296
A.1 Indications of the Transmission Protocols
Table A-1 61458
Indications of the Transmission Protokols IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 Telegram buffer overflow
F012hex 61467
Check set error
F01Bhex 61469 IEC 101/104 DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC SINAUT Configuration error Information loss
F01Dhex 61482
F02Ahex 61483
Cycle error
F02Bhex 61484 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 Message mem. warn. limit
F02Chex 61485
Command not parameterized
F02Dhex 61486
Function not available
F02Ehex 61487
Command buffer overflow
F02Fhex
297
A Anhang
Table A-1 61488
Indications of the Transmission Protokols IEC 101/104 SINAUT DNP TG 800 IEC 101/104 Telegram error
F030hex 61493
Fault in switchyard
F035hex 61499 IEC 101 X21 indication error
F03Bhex 61696 IEC 101/104 SINAUT TG 800 IEC 101/104 SINAUT Remote reset GI
F100hex 61699
F103hex 61700 SINAUT F104hex Retention circuit resolution
298
A.2 Indications of the Substation Interface
A.2
Indications of the Substation Interface

Indications of the substation interface with the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol
Table A-2 Indications of the substation interface Error text short/long Pulse error
alarm-no. 61446 F006hex 61447 F007hex 61451 F00Bhex 61469 F01Dhex 61482 F02Ahex 61485 F02Dhex 61486 F02Ehex 61487 F02Fhex 61488 F030hex 61493 F035hex Telegram error Information loss
Channel error (receive)
Command output error
Configuration error
Fault in switchyard
299
A Anhang
Table A-2 61500 F03Chex 64001 FA01hex 64002 FA02hex 65025 FE01hex 65026 FE02hex 65027 FE03hex
Indications of the substation interface Substation started
Disable telecontrol
Disable bay
Telecontrol disabled
Bay disabled
Bay disabled (IED)
300
A.3 Indications of the Bay Device Protocols
A.3
Indications of the Bay Device Protocols

Indications of the Bay Device Protocols
q q
IEC 60870-5-103 DNP V3.00

Indications of the Bay Device Protocols Error text short/long
Table A-3
Alarm no.
61469 F01Dhex 61482 F02Ahex 61485 F02Dhex 61486 F02Ehex 61487 F02Fhex 61488 F030hex 61493 F035hex
Information loss
Configuration error
Telegram error
Fault in switchyard
301
A Anhang
302
References
/1/
SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 includes: Getting Started, manuals for hardware configuration, programming and changing from S5 6ES7810-4CA06-8BA0 SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Reference Manual for V5.2 includes: Manual for LAD/STL/FDB and the Reference Manual for S7-300/400 6ES7810-4CA06-8BR0 SIMATIC S7/M7, Programmable Controllers Module Specifications S7-400, M7-400 includes: Reference manual (module data), installation manual (assembly), operation list S7-400 (reference guide) 6ES7498-8AA03-8BA0 SIMATIC S7, CFC for S7, Manual The documentation for CFC is is supplied as PDF on the product CD ROM. It is not available in printed form. SICAM RTU, Technical Description E50417-S8976-C002-A4 SICAM, Manual Analog Input Function Module AI32/16 E50417-G8976-C004-A2 SICAM, Manual Digital Input Function Module DI32 E50417-G8976-C005-A2 SICAM, Manual Command Output Function Module CO32 E50417-G8976-C006-A2 SICAM, Manual Command Release Function Module CR E50417-G8976-C007-A2 SICAM RTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS for RTU E50417-H8976-C008-A4 SICAM RTU, Function Description Advanced Functionality with RTU API E50417-H8976-C051-A4 SICAM RTU, Maintenance and Diagnostics E50417-W8976-C054-A2 SICAM RTU, Mounting Instructions E50417-B8976-C136-A2
/2/
/3/
/4/
/5/ /6/ /7/ /8/ /9/ /10/
/11/
/12/ /13/
303
References
/14/ /15/ /16/ /17/ /18/ /19/ /20/
SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS E50417-H8976-C162-A1 SICAM eRTU, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks E50417-H8976-C163-A1 SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design E50417-P8976-C164-A1 SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions E50417-B8976-C178-A1 SICAM eRTU, Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1 SICAM Diamond E50417-H8976-C183-A1 SICAM eRTU, Startup E50417-F8976-C184-A1
304
Glossary
Ab Interrogation list, telecontrol list that processes the information necessary for the communication with higher-level control centers in the monitoring direction ( COM TC). We distinguish between two different types of addresses:
q q
Address
For identifying a certain module (slot, rack) For identifying a certain operand or operand area (e.g. input I12.1).
Adjusting command
Adjusting command is a function of the output time of the command depending on the duration of the command output in the operating control center. They are apt for manual setpoint settings in slow control circuits. The Analog Input module is available with 16 relay inputs or with 32 solidstate inputs. Trigger storage list The SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system is divided into the following function-specific applications: SIM, COM IED, COM TC and Hardware Configuration. The SICAM eRTU/RTU differentiates between the operating system of the CPU and the application system. The latter is connected with the programming software STEP 7 e.g. with CFC from blocks and is stored in the code blocks. Data are stored in the data blocks. Job buffer Automatic reclosing is a function which is frequently used in power distribution for extinguishing electric arcs on overhead lines. Automatic reclosing means that a closed circuit-breaker is opened and reclosed after a short delay. The control functions are performed by a computer program and are not permanently stored in a retentive memory programmable logic controller.
AI
ASP Application
Application program
APA Automatic reclosing
Automation computer
305
Glossary
Automation system
An automation system is a programmable logic controller or an automation computer from the SIMATIC S7 family. The back-up battery ensures that pre-defined data areas, flags, timers and counters are held as retentive. SICAM RTU/eRTU works without a back-up battery. Bay devices include:
q q q q
Back-up battery
Bay device
Bay controllers Mini bay units Protection devices Measuring instruments
IED Bay device protocol Bit pattern indication Protocol which is used for communication between the substation controller and bay devices, e.g. IEC 60870-5-103. A bit pattern indication is a processing function on the digital input module which makes it possible to jointly acquire and process digital processrelated information which is present at several inputs in parallel. As bit pattern size, you can choose between 1, 2, 3 and 4 bytes. Bit pattern indication (bitstring of x bits); x designates the size in bits (8, 16, 24 or 32 bits). A bus is a transmission medium which interconnects several stations. Data transmission can be serial or parallel, via electric cables or via fiber optic cables. The central controller is the equipped rack which contains the SIMATIC M7 CPU of the SICAM SC or the SIMATIC S7 CPU of the SICAM RTU respectively. Rack Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphic editor which allows you to configure a program using prefabricated blocks. Blocks are parts of the user program. They are determined by their function, structure and intended purpose. SICAM plusTOOLS is delivered together with a library of blocks developed especially for substation control and protection systems.
BO_x
Bus
Central controller
Central rack CFC
CFC blocks
306
Glossary
Chatter blocking
A fast intermittent input (e.g. as a result of a relay contact fault) is disconnected after a parameterizable monitoring time and cannot produce any further signal changes. This function prevents the system from being overloaded in case of a fault. Restore command (counter interrogation command) Command output module In a SIMATIC S7 a code block is a block which contains part of the application program (as opposed to a data block, which contains only data). Communication to Intelligent Electronic Device. This application is used for configuring the communication to bay devices. Communication to Telecontrol Center. This application is used for configuring to higher-level control centers. Commands are safe process outputs with a defined output time. Before the output voltage is switched through, a number of checks is performed (e.g. one-out-of-n monitoring, readback of the relay drivers, impedance and electrical isolation of the load, etc.). With the command ending function, a running command output is terminated upon expiration of the parameterized output time or upon arrival of the process feedback assigned to it. The MCP communications processor manages the communication of a SICAM RTU/eRTU with higher-level telecontrol centers and/or bay devices. The number of interfaces which are available can be increased by using the XC2 and XF6 expansion modules. Format for fault records in protection devices. Configuration means arranging, addressing and parameterizing the modules of the SICAM Substation Controller and the SICAM RTU in a rack with the help of the Hardware Configuration application. The SICAM plusTOOLS data are stored in function-specific containers. Some examples are the SIM Table, the MIM Table, COM IED and COM TC. IED and COM TC. Central processing unit of the the SICAM RTU/eRTU with control and arithmetic unit, memory, operating system and interface for programming devices.
CI CO Code block
COM IED
COM TC
Command
Command ending
Communications processor
COMTRADE Configuration
Container
CPU
307
Glossary
CR Cycle time
Command release module The cycle time is the time needed by the CPU to execute the application program once. Cyclic interrupts are tasks which are started at regular intervals, i.e. cyclically. Data blocks are data areas within the application program which contain user data. There are global data blocks which can be accessed by all code blocks. Data block In the Federal Republic of Germany, the high-precision official time is managed by the Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstalt PTB (German Federal Testing Laboratories) in Brunswick. The atomic clock station of the PTB broadcasts this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter at Mainflingen near Frankfurt on the Main. The transmitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 2000 km around Frankfurt on the Main. Double command, persistent command Double command, pulse command Digital input module Modules with diagnostic capability report system faults which they have recognized by means of diagnosis alarms to the CPU. The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU into which the diagnosis events are written in chronological order. Double commands are process outputs which represent 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 determined states (e.g. ON/OFF) and 2 undetermined states (e.g. fault positions). Double-point indications are items of process information which represent 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2 determined states (e.g. ON/OFF) and 2 undetermined states (e.g. fault positions). Double-point indication
Cyclic interrupt
Data block
DB DCF77
DC_PER DC_PUL DI Diagnosis alarm
Diagnostic buffer
Double command
Double-point indication
DP
308
Glossary
DPDM Drag & Drop
Digital pulse duration modulation Copy, move and shortcut function which is commonly used in graphical user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse, seized and moved from one data area to another. Procedure for testing the interference immunity (e.g. of the process inputs/outputs). The type of coupling and the physical magnitudes are defined in the IEC 608014 standard. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) designates the ability of electrical equipment to function properly in a defined environment without affecting this environment in an unacceptable way. Electromagnetic compatibility Environmental conditions comprise all external disturbing influences to which electrical equipment may be exposed: Temperature, humidity, electrostatic and electromagnetic fields, mechanical impacts, etc. Protection device information, register in COM TC Event buffer An EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) is a voltageindependent, permanently-programmed memory for programs and data. Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) which brings the housings of electrical equipment and other conductive station components to equal or nearly equal potential in order to prevent interference or hazardous voltages between those components. Response to a runtime error. Possible responses of the operating system are:
q q q
Electrical Fast Transient (Burst)
EMC Environmental conditions
EP EPE EPROM
Equipotential bonding
Error response
Transition of the automation system to the STOP status Invocation of an organizational block/ an error task which contains a programmed reaction Error message.
Error task
Error tasks make it possible to react to certain errors which are recognized by the runtime system during runtime. There are three error classes: I/O access errors, processor errors and time-out errors.
309
Glossary
ESD protection
ESD protection encompasses all means and measures used for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices. The event buffer of the inputs (German abbreviation: EPE) is used to buffer preprocessed process events. Each event is made available in a data block. The event buffer is organized according to the first-in-firstout principle. If there is at least one data block in the EPE, a hardware interrupt is issued to indicate that it is ready for collection. The XC2 and XF6 modules are designed as expansion modules of the MCP communications processor. They can only be used in combination with the MCP module MCP assembly), in order to increase the total number of process-end interfaces. XC2 offers two serial interfaces RS232 or RS485. XF6 provides six interfaces for connecting fiber optic cables. Rack An expansion unit is an expansion rack connected to the central controller and equipped with a power supply module, an interface module and further modules. (FLASH-EPROM = Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) FLASH-EPROMs are like the electrically erasable EEPROMs in that they are able to retain data in case of a power failure, but can be erased far more quickly. They are used on memory cards. Fleeting indications are single-point indications which are present only for a very short time, where only the rising edge of the process signal is acquired and processed in real time. Isolated Function module Frame designates all interconnected inactive parts of electrical equipment which must not carry any hazardous touch voltage, not even in case of a fault. Process-end 48-pin module connector. Available with screw-type contacts, crimp contacts and spring-loaded terminals, with conductor crosssections of up to 1.5 mm 2. The available cable space has to be observed.
Event buffer
Expansion module
Expansion rack Expansion unit
FLASH-EPROM
Fleeting indication
Floating FM Frame
Front connector
310
Glossary
Function
According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a code block without any static data. A function offers the possibility of handing over parameters in the application program. Therefore functions are suitable for programming frequently recurring complex functions (e.g. calculations). Function modules are intelligent signal converters which preprocess process information, thus relieving the CPU Configuration of the FMs is done using parameters. Grounding whose sole purpose is to guarantee that the electrical equipment functions as intended. Functional grounding short-circuits interference voltages which would otherwise lead to inadmissible interferences in the electrical equipment. For the system startup, the state of all process inputs, of the status and the fault image is checked. This information is used for updating the system-end process image. It is equally possible to check the current process state after a data loss with the help of a GI. Global data are data which can be addressed from each code block. This includes e.g. inputs I, outputs O and data blocks DB. Global data can be accessed either absolutely or symbolically. Satellites with atomic clocks on board revolve around the earth on different orbits at an altitude of approx. 20,000 km twice a day. They broadcast signals which include the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver determines its own position on the basis of the signals received. From the position, it can derive the delay time of the satellite signal and thus correct the GPS universal time broadcast. The conductive soil whose electric potential can be equated with zero at any point. Near ground electrodes, the soil can have a potential not equal to zero. This phenomenon is often referred to as ground reference plane.
Function module
Functional grounding
General interrogation (GI)
Global data
GPS
Ground
Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electroconductive component to ground using a grounding system. Grounding system encompasses all means and measures used for grounding. With a group command, it is possible to output several successive commands. This function is used e.g. to implement the busbar change of a feeder in switchgear.
Grounding system
Group command
311
Glossary
Grz
Basic cycle list, telecontrol list processing information necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction ( COM TC). Configuration
Hardware configuration Hardware filter
The hardware filter eliminates the transient conditions of a digital process signal: The value 1 is only transmitted if the signal level reaches at least 80% of the 1 level for the duration of the parameterized filter time.
Hardware interrupt
Hardware interrupts are triggered by hardware interrupt signals. These interrupt signals can be assigned to a task/an organization block in order to react to external process events. In a structure with higher-level and subordinate objects, a hierarchical level consists of objects of the same level. International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardization body Telecontrol protocol Bay device protocol Intelligent Electronic Device bay device Interface module for connecting expansion units. MPI (multipoint interface) Process-end interfaces Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group The ISO 9000 ff. standards define measures for assuring the quality of a product from development to manufacturing. On isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and the load circuit are isolated (e.g. by optocouplers, relay contacts or transformers). Several load circuits can be connected to a common potential. Metered value (integrated totals)
Hierarchical level
IEC
IED IM Interface
IRIG-B ISO 9001:2000
Isolated
IT
312
Glossary
IWV
Indication with value, e.g. a protection device indication which contains the interrupted current or the fault location The K-Bus (communications bus) is a serial backplane bus which is optimized for the exchange of large data volumes. For the operating system, an interrupt is an event which controls the execution of the application program. There are different interrupt classes. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically invokes an assigned organization block, in which the user can program the desired reaction (e.g. in an FB). Hardware interrupt Cyclic interrupt
K-Bus
Interrupt
Job buffer
The job buffer of the outputs (German abbreviation: APA) is used to buffer commands on the CO (command output) and CR (command release) function modules. Only one command at a time can be written into the APA. After the command execution, the APA is cleared once again. The load memory is part of the CPU. It contains the objects generated by the programming device (PG) and is either implemented on a plug-in Memory Card or as built-in memory. Power supply for powering the input/output circuits, the sensors and the actuators. The main memory is a RAM on the CPU which the processor accesses during program execution. An MCP assembly consists of the MCP communications module and the XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules. These modules are linked by means of lateral connectors and are plugged into the rack as one unit. Communications processor Memory Cards are storage media in credit card format for the CPU. They are implemented as RAM or FLASH-EPROM. Measured value, normalized value Measured value, short floating point
Load memory
Load power supply
Main memory
MCP assembly
MCP module Memory Card
ME_NA ME_NC
313
Glossary
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function that determine the total amount of discrete similar events (count impulses), mostly as an integral over a time period. In the power supply industry normally electrical energy is recorded as a metered value (Energy import /supply, energy transport). Module Information Manager The MIM table shows all connections of the input/output modules which have been chosen in the Hardware Configuration as well as the SAS information currently assigned to it. Module parameters are variables which serve for determining the behavior of the module. An auxiliary contact on the transformer which indicates whether the tap changing function on the transformer is activated. The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programming device interface of the CPU. It serves as interface for downloading the system configuration which has been parameterized before with SICAM plusTOOLS, and for connecting the SICAM Diamond. With the help of an MPI, it is possible to realize simple networks. Each station is identified by a unique address (MPI address). MPI With a multiple command, it is possible to output several commands simultaneously. On non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and the load circuit are electrically connected. Priority class (M7) Organization block (S7). The operating system of the CPU organizes all functions and operations of the CPU which are independent of the control tasks of the application program. The automation systems of the SIMATIC S7 family knows the following operational statuses: STOP, STARTUP, RUN.
MIM Module information manager Module parameters Moving contact
MPI
MPI address Multiple command
Non-isolated
OB
Operating system of the CPU
Operational status
314
Glossary
Organization block
Orgnanization blocks (OBs) correspond to tasks. They perform the interface between the S7-CPU operating system and the user program. We provide you CFC blocks and run-time groups. The order of processing of the user program is specified in the organization blocks. - Variable of a code block - Variable for determining the behavior of a module (one or several ones per module). Each module has appropriate factory settings, which can be modified with the help of the Hardware Configuration application of STEP 7.
Parameter
P-Bus
The P-bus (I/O-bus) is a parallel backplane bus optimized for the rapid exchange of I/O data. Pulse code modulation Pulse duration modulation Subordinate basic cycle list, telecontrol list processing the information necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction ( COM TC). Programming device The process input image reflects the current status of the process inputs. The input modules keep a PII for their inputs. These PIIs are read by the CPU before each user program cycle and are combined to a system-end process input image. The process output image reflects the current status of the process outputs. After each user program cycle, the CPU copies the system-end process output image kept in its main memory into the PIO of the output modules. These output the contents of their PIO at the outputs. Programmable logic controller In the M7 family, priority classes constitute the interface between the operating system of the CPU and the application program. The order of execution of the application is defined in the tasks. The priority classes are mapped to RMOS tasks. A priority class corresponds to a task. Interfaces of the communications processors of the SICAM RTU/ eRTU to higher-level control centers and/or bay devices.
PCM PDM Per
PG PII
PIO
PLC Priority class
Process-end interfaces
315
Glossary
Process image
Reserved RAM areas of a CPU where the signal states of the input and output modules are stored. Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are electronic controllers whose functions are stored as a program in the control unit. Thus the design and the wiring of the device do not depend upon the function of the controller. Programmable logic controllers have the same components as computers: they consist of a CPU with memory, input/output modules (e.g. DI, AI, CO, CR), power supply module (PS) and rack (with bus system). The I/Os and the programming language are especially designed to meet the requirements of control engineering. Programming devices (PGs) are compact, portable, industry-standard personal computers. They distinguish themselves by having special hardware and software features suitable for programmable logic controllers. Power supply module A rack consists of a flat aluminum extruded section and the backplane PCB. Racks are used for plugging in the modules. RAM (Random Access Memory) is a semiconductor memory for read/ write access. This memory incorporates the main memory of the CPU. Regulation step command The release is part of the command execution. The release switches the command output voltage through to the checked command output circuit for a defined time. The RESET command serves for resetting a device/system and forcing a restart. Restore command for metered values (counter interrogation command). The restore command is automatically generated as soon as metered value capturing has been parameterized for a DI module or a bay device. The restore command refers to the entire module or bay device. Relay data Interchange format by Omicron. File format for fault records. Serial interfaces of the MCP assembly (RS232, RS422/485) Errors which occur during execution of the application program in the automation system (i.e. not in the process).
Programmable logic controller
Programming device
PS Rack
RAM
RC Release
RESET
Restore command
RIO file RSxxx interface Runtime error
316
Glossary
SA SAS information
Switch authority command Items of SAS information are objects in the PG/PC which serve for organizing the distribution of individual items of information in the SICAM runtime system. Each SAS information represents a certain indication or a certain command which is to be distributed within the system. This distribution takes place both between the individual modules and between the connected devices and stations. Via the S-bus, the external interfaces of the MCP communications module and its expansion modules XC2 and XF6 are assigned to the interfaces of the MCP controller. CPU of the SICAM SC from the SIMATIC M7-400 family. Single command, persistent command Single command, pulse command Digital setpoint value (setpoint command digital x bits) x designates the size on bits (8 or 16 bits). Analog setpoint value (setpoint command, normalized value) Analog setpoint value (setpoint command, short floating point) Grounding whose sole purpose is to guarantee that the electrical equipment functions as intended. Shielding short-circuits interference voltages which would otherwise lead to inadmissible interferences in the electrical equipment. Single-point indications are parameterized as short-time indications if they are available in the system only for a short time and therefore must be retained for some time in order to guarantee that they are detected reliably. SICAM Diamond is a web-based tool for performing diagnoses on the SICAM eRTU and also on the bay devices connected to the SICAM eRTU. In addition to this, SICAM Diamond provides access to an event list and allows easy controlling of switching devices. Compared to SICAM RTU, the SICAM eRTU (enhanced RTU) telecontrol system provides an advanced functionality. As an example, it also includes an option for the configuration of automation functions via
S-Bus
SC-CPU SC_PER SC_PUL SE_Dx
SE_NA SE_NC Shielding
Short-time indication
SICAM Diamond
SICAM eRTU
317
Glossary
CFC blocks. Process information can be linked directly (central process interfacing) and also via bay devices / telecontrol devices (distributed process interfacing). SICAM PCC The SICAM PC Controller is a software solution for the configuration and monitoring of substations. SICAM PCC makes use of existing communcations standards and connections. Modularly designed terminal unit on the basis of the SIMATIC S7 automation system. Signal status indications are the display elements (light-emitting diodes) at the front panel of the modules. They indicate the status of the process inputs and outputs. Thus, e.g., the signal status indicator of a digital input module lights up if the input voltage is applied to the corresponding input. Signal Modules (SM) are signal converters without any intelligence of their own which carry out a signal level adaptation between the process and the automation system. A signalling circuit is a circuit used to generate an indication. It includes the signalling-circuit voltage, the signalling contact and the wiring leading to the input of the DI module. The SICAM Information Manager application serves for managing the SAS information of the system. The SIMATIC Manager is a tool used for configuring the hardware of the Substation Controller. The SIMATIC Manager constitutes the platform for SICAM plusTOOLS. The SIM Browser is an overview over the complete station topology, with all defined pieces of SAS information Single commands are process outputs which represent 2 process states at 1 output (e.g. ON/OFF). Single-point indications are items of process information which represent 2 process states at 1 input (e.g. ON/OFF). A slot is the position in a rack where the individual modules of an automation system are mounted. For some modules (e.g. PS power supply module, IM interface module), there are fixed slot positions. Signal modules
SICAM RTU
Signal status indications
Signal modules
Signalling circuit
SIM
SIMATIC Manager
SIM-Browser
Single command
Single-point indication Slot
SM
318
Glossary
SP SP_F SP_S ST STARTUP
Single-point indication Fleeting indication (single-point, fleeting) Short-time indication (single-point, short-time) Transformer tap indication (step position information) A device passes the STARTUP operational status during the transition from the STOP operational status to the RUN operational status. The change of the operational status can be triggered by the mode selector switch, after Power-ON or by operator input at the programming device. The *.CSV station configuration file contains information on protection devices whose data are requested by SICAM Diamond. It is generated per station by the configuration system SICAM plusTOOLS. Distribution of the system data to different hierarchical levels and assignment of devices to these hierarchical levels. Status and fault indications are LEDs which are arranged at the front panel of S7-400 or M7-400 modules. They provide information on the module state. STEP 7 serves as basic software for SICAM plusTOOLS and for CFC. STEP 7 incorporates the programming languages LAD and STL. Procedure for testing the interference immunity (e.g. of the process inputs/outputs) according to IEC 602555. The type of coupling and the physical magnitudes (peak voltage, rate of rise, etc.) are defined in the IEC standard. System data blocks (SDBs) are data areas in the program which contain the system data and which determine operational sequences. A system function block (SFB) is a function block which is integrated in the operating system of the CPU. It can be invoked, if necessary, from the STEP 7 application program. A system function call (SFC) is the invocation routine of a system function which is integrated in the operating system of the CPU. With function modules, SFCs are used for reading out the event buffer of the inputs (EPE), writing into the job buffer of the outputs (APA) and handing over control commands.
Station configuration file
Station topology
Status/ fault indications
STEP 7
Surge voltage
System data blocks
System function blocks
System function call
319
Glossary
System memory
The system memory is integrated on the CPU and implemented as RAM. The system memory contains the operand areas (e.g. timers, counters, flags) as well as the data areas internally used by the operating system (e.g. stack memory area). Tasks constitute the interface between the operating system of the M7-CPU and the application program. In the tasks, the order of execution of the application programs is defined. A task corresponds to an OB (S7) or a priority class (M7). Telecontrol Center, higher-level control center communicating with the SICAM RTU/eRTU. Protocol which is used for communication between the substation controller and control centers, e.g. IEC 60870-5-101 Thresholds are a processing function on analog input modules which are used to reduce the input data volume, where minor signal changes are also processed, provided that they persist for some time. Time stamping means assigning real time to a process event. The time stamping on the FMs consist of milliseconds, seconds and minutes. The hour and the date are added on the CPU. A transducer is an electrical device for the potential isolation and the conversion of a wide variety of measured variables to standardized measuring signals (e.g. load-independent direct current). A transformer tap indication is a processing function on DI modules which makes it possible to acquire and process the different transformer tap positions. Telecontrol protocol Bay device protocol Telecontrol list that processes the information necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction ( COM TC). Telegram memory list with time, telecontrol list processing information necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction ( COM TC). Telegram memory list without time, telecontrol list processing information necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction ( COM TC).
Task
TCC
Telecontrol protocol Thresholds
Time stamping
Transducer
Transformer tap indication
Transmission protocols Trigger storage list
TSPmZ
TSPoZ
320
Glossary
Ungrounded VDEW
Without any electrical connection to the ground. Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizittswerke (Association of German Power Plants), standardization body. The version identifier allows the user to identify a module. It includes type, hardware/software release and date of creation. A watchdog is a hardware circuit for monitoring a microprocessor. If, due to a hardware or software fault, the periodic restart of an interval fails to take place, an interrupt (NMI) is triggered on the microprocessor. X.21 is a synchronous interface. Its transmission rate is determined by an external cycle (e.g. by the control center). The x-bus handles the control of the serial multiplexer of the MCP communications module and its XC2 and XF6 expansion modules. Expansion module within the MCP assembly for connecting the SICAM RTU/eRTU to higher-level control centers and for connecting bay devices with serial interfaces. Expansion module within the MCP assembly for connecting the SICAM SC to higher-level control centers and for connecting bay devices with fiber optic interfaces. Counter-controlled list, telecontrol list processing information necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction ( COM TC). Time-controlled list, telecontrol list processing information necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction ( COM TC).
Version identifier
Watchdog
X.21
X-Bus
XC2
XF6
Ze
321
Glossary
322
Index
A
A/D converter Amplifier 91 Calibration 91 Absolute time 216, 238 Address field 279 IEC60870-5-101 207 Address portion SINAUT 8-FW 243 AI Current inputs 89 Input area 161 Voltage inputs 89 Analog scheduled values 15 Application Area IEC 60870-5-104 229 Application area TELEGYR 800 279 Application layer IEC 60870-5-101 202 IEC 60870-5-104 224 TELEGYR 800 276 asynchronous interface 201, 223, 275 K bus 30 P bus 30 S bus 52 X bus 52
C
Cabinet Features 22 Lighting 24 Power supply 22 Cable Fibre-optic cables 24 Shield 24 Calibration 91 Cause of transmission 212 IEC 60870-5-104 234 Central rack 15 Channel monitoring 222 Channel monitoring time 222 Chatter blocking 153 Class 1 data 191 Clock Master 140 Clock synchronization 57 Coding switch IM 70 COM TC 180 Command output circuit 14 Command output voltage 108 Command release 108 Communication Processors 4 Protocols 4 Communication principle 201 Communications bus (K bus) 30 Connectors 63 Control centre interface 6 Control field IEC 60870-5-101 205, 206 IEC 60870-5-104 226 CPU Key switch 40 LEDs 37 Mode selector switch 39
B
Backplane bus 28, 31 Back-up battery 13, 33 Balanced Mode 190 Basic Cycle 197 Batteries 33 Bay controllers 178 Bay devices 177 Catalogue 178 DNP V3.00 178 IEC 60870-5-103 178 Interfaces 16 Third-party manufacturer 178 User-definable device 178 Bit pattern Trigger 152 Bit transmission layer 201 Bitstring 15, 78, 147 Bus connector 51 Bus systems
323
Index
Status/fault indicators 37 Crimp contacts 76 Cyclic data transmission 197
H
Hamming distance 199 Hardware filter time 153, 174
D
DCF77 120, 140 Diagnosis alarm release 161, 174 Digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM) 189 Digital scheduled values 15 DNP V3.0 Telegram fragment 264 Telegram layout 264 DNP V3.00 16, 177, 262 Physical layer 263 Dongle 49 Double command 15, 95, 167 Double-point indication 15, 78, 145
I
I/O bus (P Bus) 30 I/O modules AI 86 CO 95 CR 105 Degree of protection 76 DI 78 LEDs 118 Requirements 76 IEC 60870-5-101 16, 177 Rules for transmission 203 Telegram Length 203 IEC 60870-5-103 16, 177 IEC 60870-5-104 16 Telegram variants 225 IM 69 Coding switch 70 Local links 70 Receive module 70 Remote links 73 Send module 70 Status/fault indicators 70 Terminator 71 Information address 281 IEC 60870-5-104 236 Information in control direction 292 Information in monitoring direction 288 Information object IEC 60870-5-101 207, 214 IEC 60870-5-104 229, 236 Information points central 15 local 15 Interface modules 70 Interface modules IM 29, 69, 70 Interfaces 16, 275 Communications modules 46 Fibre-optic cables 46 MCP 57 MPI 17, 41 RS232 46, 47, 58 RS422/RS485 46, 47, 59 XC2 module 63 Interference voltage suppression 163 Internet layer IEC 60870-5-104 224 IRIG-B 140 ISO-OSI layer model 201, 223
E
Electrical isolation 108 Electromagnetic compatibility 13 EMC 13 Environmental conditions 18 Error bit 255 Event buffer 78, 161 Expansion module XC2 module 63 XF6 65 Expansion rack 15 External error bit 150 External trigger 147
F
Fault position suppression 154 Fibre-optic cables 46, 65 Technical data 67 FLASH EPROM 43 Fleeting indication 15, 78, 145 Format class 199 Frames 264 Front connector Crimp contacts 76 Screw-type contacts 76 Spring-loaded terminals 76 Full cyclic mode 198 Function field 279
G
General interrogation 196 GPS 122, 124, 140 Group fault 136 Group indications 136 Group scan 196
324
Index
K
K bus 30 Key switch 40
L
LED patterns MCP 53 LEDs 70 CPU 37 I/O modules 118 MCP 53 PS module 33 XC2 module 63 Line lengths FO cable 65 IM 71, 73 RS232 58 RS422/RS485 61 Link control IEC 60870-5-104 226 Link Header 265 Link Layer DNP V3.00 263 Link layer 276 IEC 60870-5-101 202 List counter-controlled 198 periodic 197 time-controlled 198 List structure 192 Load voltages 31 Local links 70
Memory card 43, 45 Metered value Counting memory 149 Meter pulse generator 149 Metered values 15, 78 Meter pulse edge 153 Meter pulses 149 Restore trigger 157 Restoring 157 Mode cyclic 197 spontaneous 194 Mode selector switch 39 Modulation Digital pulse duration (DPDM) 189 Pulse code (PCM) 188 MPI connector 17 MPI interface 41 Multi-point transmission 191, 258
O
Operating modes 191 Operating system SICAM RTC 12 Operation bit pattern 256 Organization block 133 Organizational Telegrams 252
P
P Bus 30 Periodic list 197 Physical layer DNP V3.00 263 IEC 60870-5-101 201 IEC 60870-5-104 223 Point-to-point transmission 190 Polling mode 190, 258 PPP layer IEC 60870-5-104 224 Process Interrupt 86 Signals 160 Process image 78 Process image mode 144 PROFIBUS DP 15, 177 Protection devices 178 Protocol combinations 181 Protokollkombinationen 200 PS module Features 31 LEDs 33 Status/fault indicators 33 PS power supply module 31
M
MCP 128 Controller 51 Enclosure 51 Interfaces 57 LEDs 53 Memory 51 Status/fault indicators 52 MCP assembly Clock master 140 Clock slave 140 Connector 52, 63, 65 Interfaces 46 MCP assembly Interfaces 16 MCP communications processor 46 Controller 51 Memory 51 Measured value 15 Snapshot 163 Memory Card 37, 41
325
Index
Pulse code modulation (PCM) 188
Q
Quick check procedure 260
R
Racks 28 Reaction time 222 Receive module 70 Relative time 215 Relay outputs 109 Release relay 113 Remote links 73 Request mode 144 Reset 57 RS232 46, 47, 58 RS422 interface 201 RS422/RS485 46, 47, 59 RS485 interface 202
S
S bus 52 Safety Command output 14 Communication 13 Functions 13 Indication acquisition 14 Measured value capturing 14 Screw-type contacts 76 Send module 70 Shield 24 SICAM eRTU Expansion 15 SICAM plusTOOLS 12 SICAM SAS Range of application 4 Tasks 4 Signaling circuit 81 Signaling-circuit voltage 81 SIM 179 SIMATIC standard modules 19 SINAUT 8-FW 16 Modulation procedures 242 Telegram Structure 245 Single command 15, 95, 166 Single fault 136 Single-point indication 15, 78, 145 Slots 15, 28 Software STEP 7 12 Spontaneous event capturing 78 Spring-loaded terminals 76 ST connectors 65 Startup procedure 219
Station address IEC 60870-5-104 235 Status and diagnostic indications AI 118 DI 118 Status information 179 Status scan 222 Status/diagnostic indications CO 118 CR 118 Status/fault indicators CPU 37 IM 70 MCP 52 PS module 33 XC2 module 63 Step position 148 Step positions 15, 78 Substation automation system 1 Substation communication 8, 178 Substation Controller SC 12 Substations 177 Integration 178 Switching current check 109 Synchronization Time 48 synchronous interface 202
T
TCP/IP 16 Telecontrol Interfaces 16 Protocol 180 System 1 Telecontrol Protocol Link layer 276 TELEGYR 800 275, 276 Telecontrol transmission protocols 199 Telegram fragment 264 Telegram ID IEC 60870-5-101 207 IEC 60870-5-104 229 Telegram layout DNP V3.00 263 IEC 60870-5-101 203 IEC 60870-5-104 225 SINAUT 8-FW 243 Telegram protection 199 SINAUT 8-FW 243 Telegram Structure SINAUT 8-FW 245 Telegram type Indications 247
326
Index
Measured-values 249 SINAUT 8-FW 245 Switching commands 251 TELEGYR Hardware address 281 TELEGYR 800 16, 275 Address field 279 Application area 279 Application layer 276 Communication principle 275 Function field 279 Information address 281 Information in control direction 292 Information in monitoring direction 288 Interfaces 275 Link layer 276 Rules for transmission 277 Telegram layout 278 TELEGYR 8979 16 Terminating resitor 59 Terminator 71 Threshold processing 161 Time 48 Slave 140 Time monitoring 222 Time signal 120, 122, 124 Telegrams from control centre 140 Time signal receiver 140 Time signal receivers 48 DCF77 120 GPS 122, 124 Time synchronization 120, 122, 124 Transformer taps Encoding 155 external error bit 150 Trigger 154 Transmission channel Monitoring 222 Transmission Lists Number 193 Structure 192 Transmission mode symmetric 194 Transmission procedure Asymmetric 191 Symmetric 190 Transmission protocol Telecontrol 199 Transmission protocols 180 Transmission rate 58, 61 Transmission speed SINAUT 8-FW 242 Transport Header
DNP 264 Transport layer IEC 60870-5-104 224 Trigger delay 150, 174 Types of transmission 191
U
Unbalanced Mode 191
V
V.24/V.28 interface 201, 223, 275 Variable structure identifier IEC 60870-5-101 211 IEC 60870-5-104 233
W
Wave length 65
X
X bus 52 X.21 interface 202 XC2 48 XC2 module 63 LEDs 63 Status and fault indications 63 XF6 48, 65
Z
Zero suppression 162
327
Index
328
To: Siemens AG PTD PA D DM Postfach 4806 90026 Nrnberg, Germany
From: Your Your name : title : .......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................
Your company : Department : Street : City, State : Phone : FAX :
Please indicate your area of work with a checkmark:

q q q q q
Automation Mining (incl. strip mining) Chemical industry Power generation Power distribution, power system management Gas/water/sanitary utilities Other
q q
Building services, air conditioning Heavy machine construction, handling systems Pipelines Shipbuilding, navigation Environmental technology Traffic and transportation
q q q q
q q
Comments / Suggestions Your comments and suggestions will help us to improve the usability of our documentation. Please fill out this questionnaire and mail or fax it back to Siemens (FAX number +49 911 433-8518).
Title of the Manual: Order No. of the Manual:
SICAM eRTU, Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1
Please answer the following questions by giving a rating between 1 = good and 5 = poor. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do the contents cover your requirements? Were you able to find the information you need easily? Did you find the texts easy to understand? Does the information depth meet your requirements? How do you rate the quality of the illustrations? ................ ................ ................ ................ ................
If you have encountered any specific problems, please give us a concise description below: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................

Язык

Добро пожаловать в Scribd!

eRTU_hbb

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Дата загрузки

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Описание:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

eRTU_hbb

Загружено:

Описание:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Похожие издания

Foreword, Table of Contents The SICAM eRTU System

SICAM eRTU Technical Description

Release: 17.06.03 E50417-S8976-C179-A1

Book No. E50417-S8976-C179-A1

Scope of validity of this manual Standards

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

Overview over the SICAM for eRTU Documentation

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

Configuring the control

/14/ /17/ Diagnostics / troubleshooting

/18/ /14/ /13/ /19/

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

171 172 172 172 173 173 174

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

11.6 11.6.1 11.6.2 11.6.3 11.6.4 11.6.5 A

References Glossary Index

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-H8976-C162-A1

The SICAM eRTU System

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

System Description System Safety System Capacity Expandability

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

1 The SICAM eRTU System

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

1.1 System Description

SICAM eRTU fulfils the following main tasks:

Specific automation tasks

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

1 The SICAM eRTU System

Bay device connection

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

1.1 System Description

SICAM eRTU system architecture

Control centre / node

SICAM plusTOOLS Configuration

SICAM eRTU Controller

Bay devices with IEC 60870-5-103

Configuration of a SICAM eRTU, example

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

1 The SICAM eRTU System

Control centre communication with IEC 60870-5104

to control center (via WAN) Router Station LAN (Industrial Ethernet)

Terminal Server RS232 port

SICAM eRTU Controller

LAN Local Area Network WAN Wide Area Network

SICAM eRTU Technical Description E50417-S8976-C179-A1

1.1 System Description

to control center (via WAN) Router RS232 port

SICAM eRTU Controller

Control center communication with IEC 60870-5-104

Bay device connection via PROFIBUS

Control centre / node